Physical Science PDF

The Commission on Higher Education
in collaboration with the Philippine Normal University
Teaching Guide for Senior High School
PHYSICAL SCIENCE
CORE SUBJECT
This Teaching Guide was collaboratively developed and
reviewed by educators from public and private schools,
colleges, and universities. We encourage teachers and other
education stakeholders to email their feedback, comments, and
recommendations to the Commission on Higher Education, K to
12 Transition Program Management Unit - Senior High School
Support Team at [email protected]. We value your feedback
and recommendations.
Development Team
Team Leader: Jose Perico H. Esguerra, Ph.D.
Writers
Chemistry Part: Gian Karlo R. Dapul, Maria Kristina
This Teaching Guide by the
Salazar
Commission on Higher Education is
Physics Part: Johnrob Y. Bantang, Ph.D. licensed under a Creative
Technical Editors: Nathaniel P. Hermosa, Ph.D., Commons Attribution-
NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0
Clarisa C. Avila
International License. This means
Published by the Commission on Higher Education, 2016  Copyreader: Ruth Santos you are free to:
Chairperson: Patricia B. Licuanan, Ph.D. Illustrator: Kristelle Adeline C. Ramos Share — copy and redistribute the
Commission on Higher Education  material in any medium or format
Adapt — remix, transform, and
K to 12 Transition Program Management Unit 
build upon the material.
Office Address: 4th Floor, Commission on Higher Education, Senior High School Support Team  The licensor, CHED, cannot revoke
C.P. Garcia Ave., Diliman, Quezon City  CHED K to 12 Transition Program Management Unit these freedoms as long as you
Telefax: (02) 441-0927 / E-mail Address: [email protected] follow the license terms. However,
Program Director: Karol Mark R. Yee
under the following terms:
Lead for Senior High School Support:  Attribution — You must give
Gerson M. Abesamis appropriate credit, provide a link to
Consultants the license, and indicate if changes
Course Development Officers:  were made. You may do so in any
THIS PROJECT WAS DEVELOPED WITH THE PHILIPPINE NORMAL UNIVERSITY. 
John Carlo P. Fernando, Danie Son D. Gonzalvo, reasonable manner, but not in any
University President: Ester B. Ogena, Ph.D. 
Stanley Ernest G. Yu way that suggests the licensor
VP for Academics: Ma. Antoinette C. Montealegre, Ph.D. 
endorses you or your use.
VP for University Relations & Advancement: Rosemarievic V. Diaz, Ph.D. Lead for Policy Advocacy and Communications:  NonCommercial — You may not use
Averill M. Pizarro the material for commercial
Ma. Cynthia Rose B. Bautista, Ph.D., CHED 
Bienvenido F. Nebres, S.J., Ph.D., Ateneo de Manila University  Teacher Training Officers:  purposes.
ShareAlike — If you remix,
Carmela C. Oracion, Ph.D., Ateneo de Manila University  Ma. Theresa C. Carlos, Mylene E. Dones
transform, or build upon the
Minella C. Alarcon, Ph.D., CHED Monitoring and Evaluation Officer:  material, you must distribute your
Gareth Price, Sheffield Hallam University  Robert Adrian N. Daulat contributions under the same license
Stuart Bevins, Ph.D., Sheffield Hallam University as the original.
Administrative Officers:  
Ma. Leana Paula B. Bato, Kevin Ross D. Nera,
Allison A. Danao, Ayhen Loisse B. Dalena
Printed in the Philippines by EC-TEC Commercial, No. 32 St.
Louis Compound 7, Baesa, Quezon City, [email protected]
Introduction
As the Commission supports DepEd’s implementation of Senior High School (SHS), it upholds the vision
and mission of the K to 12 program, stated in Section 2 of Republic Act 10533, or the Enhanced Basic
Education Act of 2013, that “every graduate of basic education be an empowered individual, through a
program rooted on...the competence to engage in work and be productive, the ability to coexist in
fruitful harmony with local and global communities, the capability to engage in creative and critical
thinking, and the capacity and willingness to transform others and oneself.”
To accomplish this, the Commission partnered with the Philippine Normal University (PNU), the National
Center for Teacher Education, to develop Teaching Guides for Courses of SHS. Together with PNU, this
Teaching Guide was studied and reviewed by education and pedagogy experts, and was enhanced with
appropriate methodologies and strategies.
Furthermore, the Commission believes that teachers are the most important partners in attaining this
goal. Incorporated in this Teaching Guide is a framework that will guide them in creating lessons and
assessment tools, support them in facilitating activities and questions, and assist them towards deeper
content areas and competencies. Thus, the introduction of the SHS for SHS Framework.
The SHS for SHS Framework, which stands for “Saysay-Husay-Sarili for Senior High School,” is at the
core of this book. The lessons, which combine high-quality content with flexible elements to
SHS for SHS accommodate diversity of teachers and environments, promote these three fundamental concepts:
Framework
SAYSAY: MEANING HUSAY: MASTERY SARILI: OWNERSHIP
Why is this important? How will I deeply understand this? What can I do with this?
Through this Teaching Guide, Given that developing mastery When teachers empower
teachers will be able to facilitate goes beyond memorization, learners to take ownership of
an understanding of the value teachers should also aim for their learning, they develop
of the lessons, for each learner deep understanding of the independence and self-
to fully engage in the content subject matter where they lead direction, learning about both
on both the cognitive and learners to analyze and the subject matter and
affective levels. synthesize knowledge. themselves.
1
Earth Science is a Core Subject taken in the first semester of Grade 11. This learning area is
About this  designed to provide a general background for the understanding of the Earth on a planetary
Teaching Guide scale. It presents the history of the Earth through geologic time. It discusses the Earth’s
structure and composition, the processes that occur beneath and on the Earth’s surface, as
well as issues, concerns, and problems pertaining to Earth’s resources.
Implementing this course at the senior high school level is subject to numerous challenges
with mastery of content among educators tapped to facilitate learning and a lack of
resources to deliver the necessary content and develop skills and attitudes in the learners,
being foremost among these.
In support of the SHS for SHS framework developed by CHED, these teaching guides were
crafted and refined by biologists and biology educators in partnership with educators from
focus groups all over the Philippines to provide opportunities to develop the following:
Saysay through meaningful, updated, and context-specific content that highlights important
points and common misconceptions so that learners can connect to their real-world
experiences and future careers;
Husay through diverse learning experiences that can be implemented in a resource-poor
classroom or makeshift laboratory that tap cognitive, affective, and psychomotor domains
are accompanied by field-tested teaching tips that aid in facilitating discovery and
development of higher-order thinking skills; and
Sarili through flexible and relevant content and performance standards allow learners the
freedom to innovate, make their own decisions, and initiate activities to fully develop their
academic and personal potential.
These ready-to-use guides are helpful to educators new to either the content or biologists
new to the experience of teaching Senior High School due to their enriched content
presented as lesson plans or guides. Veteran educators may also add ideas from these
guides to their repertoire. The Biology Team hopes that this resource may aid in easing the
transition of the different stakeholders into the new curriculum as we move towards the
constant improvement of Philippine education.
This Teaching Guide is mapped and aligned to the DepEd SHS Curriculum, designed to be highly
Parts of the  usable for teachers. It contains classroom activities and pedagogical notes, and is integrated with
Teaching Guide innovative pedagogies. All of these elements are presented in the following parts:
1. Introduction
• Highlight key concepts and identify the essential questions
• Show the big picture
• Connect and/or review prerequisite knowledge
• Clearly communicate learning competencies and objectives
• Motivate through applications and connections to real-life
2. Motivation
• Give local examples and applications
• Engage in a game or movement activity
• Provide a hands-on/laboratory activity
• Connect to a real-life problem
3. Instruction/Delivery
• Give a demonstration/lecture/simulation/hands-on activity
• Show step-by-step solutions to sample problems
• Give applications of the theory
• Connect to a real-life problem if applicable
4. Practice
• Discuss worked-out examples
• Provide easy-medium-hard questions
• Give time for hands-on unguided classroom work and discovery
• Use formative assessment to give feedback
5. Enrichment
• Provide additional examples and applications
• Introduce extensions or generalisations of concepts
• Engage in reflection questions
• Encourage analysis through higher order thinking prompts
6. Evaluation
• Supply a diverse question bank for written work and exercises
• Provide alternative formats for student work: written homework, journal, portfolio, group/individual
projects, student-directed research project
3
On DepEd Functional Skills and CHED College Readiness Standards
As Higher Education Institutions (HEIs) welcome the graduates of On the other hand, the Commission declared the College
the Senior High School program, it is of paramount importance to Readiness Standards that consist of the combination of knowledge,
align Functional Skills set by DepEd with the College Readiness skills, and reflective thinking necessary to participate and succeed -
Standards stated by CHED. without remediation - in entry-level undergraduate courses in
The DepEd articulated a set of 21st century skills that should be college.
embedded in the SHS curriculum across various subjects and tracks. The alignment of both standards, shown below, is also presented in
These skills are desired outcomes that K to 12 graduates should this Teaching Guide - prepares Senior High School graduates to the
possess in order to proceed to either higher education, revised college curriculum which will initially be implemented by AY
employment, entrepreneurship, or middle-level skills development. 2018-2019.
College Readiness Standards Foundational Skills DepEd Functional Skills
Produce all forms of texts (written, oral, visual, digital) based on:
1. Solid grounding on Philippine experience and culture;
2. An understanding of the self, community, and nation; Visual and information literacies, media literacy, critical thinking
3. Application of critical and creative thinking and doing processes; and problem solving skills, creativity, initiative and self-direction
4. Competency in formulating ideas/arguments logically, scientifically, and creatively; and
5. Clear appreciation of one’s responsibility as a citizen of a multicultural Philippines and a
diverse world;
Global awareness, scientific and economic literacy, curiosity,

Systematically apply knowledge, understanding, theory, and skills for the development of
critical thinking and problem solving skills, risk taking, flexibility
the self, local, and global communities using prior learning, inquiry, and experimentation and adaptability, initiative and self-direction
Global awareness, media literacy, technological literacy,

Work comfortably with relevant technologies and develop adaptations and innovations for
creativity, flexibility and adaptability, productivity and
significant use in local and global communities accountability
Global awareness, multicultural literacy, collaboration and

Communicate with local and global communities with proficiency, orally, in writing, and
interpersonal skills, social and cross-cultural skills, leadership
through new technologies of communication and responsibility
Interact meaningfully in a social setting and contribute to the fulfilment of individual and Media literacy, multicultural literacy, global awareness,
collaboration and interpersonal skills, social and cross-cultural
shared goals, respecting the fundamental humanity of all persons and the diversity of
skills, leadership and responsibility, ethical, moral, and spiritual
groups and communities values
The Physical Science Core subject is composed of two major scientific fields, Chemistry and Physics.
Physical Inside, the teachers can come across Physical Science lessons, including the formation of the most ancient
elements in the universe, chemical composition of household and personal care products, and the
Science understanding of the Cosmos.
Teaching While the topics to be covered are rather extensive across disciplines, the Writing Team has ensured to
tailor fit the materials to the basic education level. In the writing workshops, all Writers have considered
Guides different circumstances inside the senior high school classroom.
As final note to the users, the Chemistry part covers all competencies and the Physics part covers half of
the competencies, which are all quality sample lessons. The Writing Team hopes that this Teaching Guide
be able to help the teachers in ensuring quality content and strategy in teaching Physical Science.
K to 12 BASIC EDUCATION CURRICULUM
SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL – CORE SUBJECT
Grade: Grade 11/12 No. of Hours/Quarter: 40 hours/quarter

Core Subject Title: Physical Science Prerequisite (if needed): None
Core Subject Description: Evolution of our understanding of matter, motion, electricity, magnetism, light, and the universe from ancient times to the present; applications
of physics and chemistry concepts in contexts such as atmospheric phenomena, cosmology, astronomy, vision, medical instrumentation, space technology, drugs, sources of
energy, pollution and recycling, fitness and health, and cosmetics.
CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

(The learners demonstrate an (The learners...) (The learners...)
understanding of...)
QUARTER 3
How the elements found 1. the formation of the elements make a creative representation of 1. give evidence for and explain the
in the universe were during the Big Bang and during the historical development of the formation of the light elements S11/12PS-IIIa-1
formed stellar evolution atom or the the chemical element in the Big Bang theory
in a timeline (3 hours)
2. the distribution of the chemical
elements and the isotopes in 2. give evidence for and describe
the universe the formation of heavier
S11/12PS-IIIa-2
elements during star formation
and evolution
3. write the nuclear fusion

reactions that take place in stars,
S11/12PS-IIIa-3
which lead to the formation of
new elements
4. describe how elements heavier

S11/12PS-IIIa-b-4
than iron are formed
How the idea of the atom, 3. how the concept of the atom
along with the idea of the evolved from Ancient Greek to
elements evolved the present 5. describe the ideas of the Ancient S11/12PS-IIIa-b-5
Greeks on the atom
K to 12 Senior High School Core Curriculum – Physical Science May 2016 Page 1 of 17

4. how the concept of the

element evolved from Ancient 6. describe the ideas of the Ancient
S11/12PS-IIIa-b-6
Greek to the present Greeks onthe elements
(2 hours)
7. describe the contributions of the

alchemists to the science of S11/12PS-IIIb-7
chemistry
8. point out the main ideas in the

discovery of the structure of the S11/12PS-IIIb-8
atom and its subatomic particles
(3 hours)
9. cite the contributions of J.J.

Thomson, Ernest Rutherford,
Henry Moseley, and Niels Bohr to S11/12PS-IIIb-9
the understanding of the
structure of the atom
10. describe the nuclear model of

the atom and the location of its
S11/12PS-IIIb-10
major components (protons,
neutrons, and electrons)
11. explain how the concept of

atomic number led to the
S11/12PS-IIIb-11
synthesis of new elements in the
laboratory

12. write the nuclear reactions

S11/12PS-IIIb-12
involved in the synthesis of new
elements
13. cite the contribution of John

Dalton toward the understanding S11/12PS-IIIc-13
of the concept of the chemical
elements
(1 hour)
14. explain how Dalton’s theory

S11/12PS-IIIc-14
contributed to the discovery of
other elements
How the properties of 1. how the uses of different 1. determine if a molecule is polar
S11/12PS-IIIc-15
matter relate to their materials are related to their or non polar given its structure
chemical structure properties and structures (2 hours)
2. relate the polarity of a molecule
2. the relationship between the to its properties S11/12PS-IIIc-16
function and structure of
3. describe the general types of
biological macromolecules
intermolecular forces S11/12PS-IIIc-d-17
(3 hours)
4. give the type of intermolecular
forces in the properties of
S11/12PS-IIId-e-18
substances
(3 hours)
5. explain the effect of
intermolecular forces on the S11/12PS-IIId-e-19
properties of substances
6. explain how the uses of the
following materials depend on S11/12PS-IIId-e-20

their properties:
a. medical implants, prosthesis
b. sports equipment
c. electronic devices
d. construction supplies for
buildings and furniture
e. household gadgets
7. explain how the properties of the

above materials are determined S11/12PS-IIId-e-21
by their structure
8. explain how the structures of

biological macromolecules such
as carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic S11/12PS-IIIe-22
acid, and proteins determine
their properties and functions
(3 hours)
make either a poster, a flyer, or a 1. use simple collision theory to
How chemical changes 1. the following aspects of brochure on a product(such as explain the effects of
take place chemical changes: fuels, household, or personal care concentration, temperature, and
S11/12PS-IIIf-23
products) indicating its uses, particle size on the rate of
a. how fast a reaction takes properties, mode of action, and reaction
place precautions
b. how much reactants are 2. define catalyst and describe how
S11/12PS-IIIf-24
needed and how much it affects reaction rate
products are formed in a
reaction (2 hours)
c. how much energy is 3. calculate the amount of
involved in a reaction substances used or produced in
S11/12PS-IIIf-h-25
a chemical reaction
2. how energy is harnessed (7 hours)

4. calculate percent yield of a

S11/12PS-IIIh-26
reaction
(1 hour)
5. determine the limiting reactant

in a reaction and calculate the S11/12PS-IIIh-27
amount of product formed
(2 hours)
6. recognize that energy is released

or absorbed during a chemical S11/12PS-IIIi-28
reaction
(1 hour)
7. describe how energy is

harnessed from different
sources:
a. fossil fuels
b. biogas
S11/12PS-IIIi-29
c. geothermal
d. hydrothermal
e. batteries
f. solar cells
g. biomass
(2 hours)
How chemistry The properties and mode of action 1. give common examples of S11/12PS-IIIi-j-30
contributes to the of the following consumer cleaning materials for the house
understanding of products: and for personal care
household and personal
care products a. cleaning materials 2. from product labels, identify the S11/12PS-IIIi-j-31
b. cosmetics active ingredient(s) of cleaning
products used at home

3. give the use of the other S11/12PS-IIIi-j-32

ingredients in cleaning agents
4. give common examples of S11/12PS-IIIi-j-33

personal care products used to
enhance the appearance of the
human body
S11/12PS-IIIi-j-34
5. identify the major ingredients of
cosmetics such as body lotion,
skin whitener, deodorants,
shaving cream, and and perfume
S11/12PS-IIIi-j-35
6. explain the precautionary
measures indicated in various
cleaning products and cosmetics
(5 hours for competences 2-6)

QUARTER 4
How we come to realize 1. Greek views of matter, motion, 1. explain what the Greeks
that the Earth is not the and the universe considered to be the three types S11/12PS-IVa-36
center of the Universe. of terrestrial motion
2. competing models of the
universe by Eudoxus, Aristotle,
Aristarchus, Ptolemy, 2. explain what is meant by diurnal
3. Copernicus, Brahe, and Kepler motion, annual motion, S11/12PS-IVa-37
precession of the equinoxes
4. evidence that the Earth is not

the center of the universe

3. explain how the Greeks knew
that the Earth is spherical S11/12PS-IVa-38
4. explain how Plato’s problem of

“Saving the Appearances”
S11/12PS-IVa-39
constrained Greek models of the
Universe
5. compare and contrast the

models/descriptions of the
universe by Eudoxus, Aristotle, S11/12PS-IVa-40
Aristarchus, Ptolemy, and
Copernicus
6. cite examples of astronomical

phenomena known to S11/12PS-IVa-41
astronomers before the advent
of telescopes
7. compare and contrast

explanations and models of
astronomical phenomena
(Copernican, Ptolemaic, and S11/12PS-IVa-42
Tychonic)

8. explain how Galileo’s

astronomical discoveries and
observations (lunar craters,
phases of Venus, moons of
Jupiter, sun spots, supernovas,
S11/12PS-IVb-43
the apparently identical size of
stars as seen through the naked
eye, and telescope observations)
helped weaken the support for
the Ptolemaic model.
9. explain how Brahe’s innovations

and extensive collection of data
in observational astronomy
S11/12PS-IVb-44
paved the way for Kepler’s
discovery of his laws of planetary
motion
10. apply Kepler’s 3rd law of

planetary motion to objects in S11/12PS-IVb-45
the solar system
Why we believe that the 1. Aristotelian vs. Galilean views 1. compare and contrast the
laws of physics are of motion Aristotelian and Galilean
universal conceptions of vertical motion, S11/12PS-IVc-46
2. how Galileo used his horizontal motion, and projectile
discoveries in mechanics (and motion.
astronomy) to address

scientific objections to the

Copernican model 2. explain how Galileo inferred that
objects in vacuum fall with
3. Newton’s Laws of Motion uniform acceleration, and that S11/12PS-IVc-47
force is not necessary to sustain
4. Newton’s Law of Universal horizontal motion
Gravitation
5. mass, momentum, and 3. explain how the position vs.

energy conservation time, and velocity vs. time
graphs of constant velocity S11/12PS-IVc-48
motion are different from those
of constant acceleration motion
4. recognize that the everyday

usage and the physics usage of
the term “acceleration” differ: In
physics an object that is slowing S11/12PS-IVc-49
down, speeding up, or changing
direction is said to be
accelerating
5. explain each of Newton’s three

laws of motion S11/12PS-IVd-50

6. explain the subtle distinction

between Newton’s 1st Law of
Motion (or Law of Inertia) and
S11/12PS-IVd-51
Galileo’s assertion that force is
not necessary to sustain
horizontal motion
7. use algebra, Newton’s 2nd Law

of Motion, and Newton’s Law of
Universal Gravitation to show
that, in the absence of air
S11/12PS-IVd-52
resistance, objects close to the
surface of the Earth fall with
identical accelerations
independent of their mass.
8. explain the statement “Newton's

laws of motion are axioms while
Kepler's laws of planetary motion S11/12PS-IVe-53
are empirical laws.”
9. explain the contributions of

scientists to our understanding
S11/12PS-IVe-54
of mass, momentum, and
energy conservation

10. use the law of conservation of

momentum to solve one- S11/12PS-IVe-55
dimensional collision problems
How light acts as a wave 1. describe what happens when

and a particle light is reflected, refracted, S11/12PS-IVf-56
transmitted, and absorbed
2. explain how Newton and

Descartes described the S11/12PS-IVf-57
emergence of light in various
colors through prisms
3. cite examples of waves (e.g.,

water, stadium, sound, string, S11/12PS-IVf-58
and light waves)
4. describe how the propagation of

light, reflection, and refraction
S11/12PS-IVf-59
are explained by the wave model
and the particle model of light
5. explain how the photon theory

of light accounts for atomic
S11/12PS-IVf-60
spectra

6. explain how the photon concept

and the fact that the energy of a
photon is directly proportional to
its frequency can be used to
explain why red light is used in
S11/12PS-IVf-61
photographic dark rooms, why
we get easily sunburned in
ultraviolet light but not in visible
light, and how we see colors
7. apply the wavelength-speed-

frequency relation S11/12PS-IVg-62
8. describe how Galileo and

Roemer contributed to the
eventual acceptance of the view S11/12PS-IVg-63
that the speed of light is finite
9. cite experimental evidence

S11/12PS-IVg-64
showing that electrons can
behave like waves
10. differentiate dispersion,

S11/12PS-IVh-65
scattering, interference, and
diffraction
11. explain various light phenomena
such as:
a. your reflection on the
S11/12PS-IVh-66
concave and convex sides of
a spoon looks different
b. mirages

c. light from a red laser passes

more easily though red
cellophane than green
cellophane
d. clothing of certain colors
appear different in artificial
light and in sunlight
e. haloes, sundogs, primary
rainbows, secondary
rainbows, and
supernumerary bows
f. why clouds are usually white
and rainclouds dark
g. why the sky is blue and
sunsets are reddish
12. explain the contributions of
Franklin, Coulomb, Oersted,
Ampere, Biot-Savart, Faraday,
S11/12PS-IVi-67
and Maxwell to our
understanding of electricity and
magnetism (3 hours)
13. describe how Hertz produced S11/12PS-IVi-68

radio pulses
1. explain how special relativity

How physics helps us 1. Relativity and the Big Bang resolved the conflict between
understand the Cosmos Newtonian mechanics and S11/12PS-IVi-j-69
2. Planets in and beyond the Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory
Solar System (3 hours)

2. explain the consequences of the

postulates of Special Relativity
(e.g., relativity of simultaneity,
S11/12PS-IVi-j-70
time dilation, length contraction,
mass-energy equivalence, and
cosmic speed limit)
3. explain the consequences of the
postulates of General Relativity
(e.g., correct predictions of shifts
S11/12PS-IVi-j-71
in the orbit of Mercury,
gravitational bending of light,
and black holes)
4. explain how the speeds and
distances of far-off objects are
estimated (e.g., Doppler effect S11/12PS-IVj-72
and cosmic distance ladder)
(2 hours)
5. explain how we know that we
live in an expanding universe,
which used to be hot and is S11/12PS-IVj-73
approximately 14billion years old
6. explain how Doppler shifts and

transits can be used to detect S11/12PS-IVj-74
extra solar planets
7. explain why Pluto was once

thought to be a planet but is no S11/12PS-IVj-75
longer considered one
Code Book Legend
Sample: S11/12PS-IIIa-1
LEGEND SAMPLE
Learning Area and Strand/ Subject or

Science
Specialization
First Entry S11/12
Grade Level Grade 11/12
Domain/Content/
Uppercase Letter/s
Component/ Topic
Physical Science PS
-
Roman Numeral
*Zero if no specific quarter
Quarter Third Quarter III
Lowercase Letter/s
*Put a hyphen (-) in between letters to indicate more Week Week one a
than a specific week
-
give evidence for and explain the formation
Arabic Number Competency
of the light elements in the Big Bang theory
1
References:
Griffith, W. Thomas and Juliet Wain Brosing. The Physics of Everyday Phenomena: A Conceptual Introduction to Physics, 6th ed. NY: McGraw Hill, 2009.
Hewitt, Paul G. Conceptual Physics 11th edition. San Francisco: Pearson, 2015.
March, Robert . Physics for Poets, 5th ed. NY: McGraw-Hill 2003.
Naylor, John. Out of the Blue: A 24-hour Skywatcher's Guide. England: Cambridge University Press, 2002.
Pasachoff, Jay and Alex Filipenko. The Cosmos: Astronomy in the New Millenium. California: Thomson-Brooks/Cole, 2007.
Shipman, James T., Jerry D. Wilson, and Charles A. Higgins. An Introduction to Physical Science. Singapore: Cengage Learning Asia Pte Ltd, 2013.
Spielberg, Nathan and Bryon D. Anderson. Seven Ideas that Shook the Universe, 2nd ed. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, 1995.
Physical)Science)) 120 MINS
In The Beginning (Big Bang Theory and

Formation of the Light LESSON OUTLINE
Elements) Introduction Overview of the objectives and key
/&Review terms for the quarter
10
Content&Standards& Motivation Cosmology and the Big Bang model as a 15

The learners demonstrate an understanding of: cosmological theory from science
1. The formation of the elements during the Big Bang and during stellar Instruction&/& Key points, Illustration of expansion, 55
evolution Delivery Nucleosynthesis reactions, and Proofs of
2. The distribution of the chemical elements and the isotopes in the universe the Big Bang Model
Performance&Standards& Practice Nucleosynthesis game 20

The learners shall be able to effectively present or discuss the aspects of a
Enrichment Reading of a related text: The Cosmic
scientific theory in light of its evidence.
Connection
Learning&Competencies&
Evaluation Additional Exercises, Performance task 20
The learners give evidence for and explain the formation of the light elements
to compare Steady State Theory to Big
in the Big Bang theory (S11/12PS-IIIa-1)
Bang model
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes&
The learners should be able to Materials • Projector, computer, speakers
1. Briefly discuss the cosmology of the Big Bang model • For activity: balloons, balloon pump
(optional), small stickers (any design)
2. Provide an overview of the proof for the Big Bang model
• For game: see materials in Annex B
3. Write reactions involving the nucleosynthesis of the first elements
Resources&
(1) Contemporary Physics Education Project (CPEP). (2003
INTRODUCTION (10 MINS) November). Chapter 10: Origin of the elements. Retrieved
September 16, 2015 from http://www2.lbl.gov/abc/wallchart/
Overview of the objectives and key terms for the quarter teachersguide/pdf/Chap10.pdf ;
1. Give a big picture of Chemistry by describing it as “the study of stuff.” (2) see additional resources at the end of the lesson
1
Give a general outline of the lessons for the quarter: Teacher&Tips:&
• Study where all the stuff in the universe came from. 1. The “study of stuff” is a simplification of
chemistry to mean the study of matter, its
• See how our understanding of all stuff has changed and continues to change. make-up, its properties, and the changes it
• Try to find answers as to why stuff is a certain way and why it changes in certain ways. undergoes. Have the learners copy the
general lesson outline so that they know
• Develop an appreciation of why stuff is important in our daily lives. what to expect from the lessons.
2. Display the objectives and terms

2. Introduce the learning objective below using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim, Own prominently on one side of the classroom
Words, Read-aloud): and refer to them frequently during
discussion.
a. I can give evidence for and explain the formation of the light elements in the Big Bang
theory. 3. Place important terms in a blank bingo
card grid. Learners can write a short
definition of the term under each entry to
3. Introduce the following list of important terms that learners will encounter: block out a square in the bingo card. This
• Cosmology will serve as reference guide/method for
formative assessment.
• Big Bang theory/Big Bang model
• Singularity
• Inflation
• Annihilation
• Recombination
• Redshift
• Relative abundance
• Cosmic microwave background
MOTIVATION (15 MINS)
Cosmology and the Big Bang model as a cosmological theory from science.
4. Briefly define cosmology as the study of how the universe began, how it continues to exist, and
how it will end. Offer examples of cosmologies from different religions and cultures based on their
beliefs. You may ask for examples from the class. Challenge the class: Do you think there is proof
2
that any of these stories or cosmologies are true?
Ask why different cultures have the need to explain where they came from and how the world was
created.
5. Explain that science brings forth a cosmological theory, not from belief, but from scientific
evidence that the universe once began to expand and continues to expand until today. This theory
was eventually called the Big Bang theory or Big Bang model. Astronomers George Lemaître and
Edwin Hubble were some of its first proponents.
Mention that George Lemaître was a Catholic priest. He did not find his theory (or science as a
whole) incompatible with his religion. Ask for possible reasons why some people think science
goes against what they believe in.
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY (55 MINS) Teacher&Tips:&

6. There are several limitations and
Key points, Illustration of expansion, Nucleosynthesis reactions, and Proofs of the Big Bang Model misconceptions associated with discussing
6. Use a chart or diagram to discuss the key stages of the Big Bang model. the Big Bang Theory. Keep in mind the
following:
• The Big Bang refers to the very
a. The universe may have begun as an infinitely hot and dense initial singularity, a point with all start of the whole process called the Big
of space, time, matter and energy. This means that there was no where, when or what. There is Bang model.
• The Big Bang was NOT an
no space around the singularity – just nothingness. explosion that carried matter outward from
b. All of it then began to rapidly expand in a process known as inflation. Space itself expanded a point. It refers to the rapid inflation of
faster than the speed of light. In this still hot and dense mass of the universe, pairs of matter space itself.
• The theory does not explain what
and antimatter (quarks and antiquarks) were formed from energy, but these pairs cancelled each caused it or where the singularity came
other back into energy (annihilation). from, BUT the Big Bang model does not
c. The universe cooled down as it expanded. An excess of matter (electrons, protons, neutrons need a cause to be a valid theory. It simply
needs to show that observations and
and other particles) somehow came to be in a highly energetic “plasma soup.” Photons (light evidence validate its assumptions. The
particles) were being scattered everywhere in this “soup”. Protons and neutrons came together model is a work in progress that we are still
to form different types of nuclei by nucleosynthesis or nuclear fusion. finding evidence for until now.
d. Much later on, electrons started to bind to ionized protons and nuclei forming neutral atoms
3
in a process called recombination. The bound particles no longer scattered photons so light and
energy moved freely across space. The period was hence known as the “dark ages”.
e. Gravity caused these atoms to collapse onto one another to form stars and galaxies and
eventually, other matter. This still happens until today. Space also continues to expand at an
accelerating rate, thus increasing the distance between the matters inside it.
7. Conduct a group activity that attempts to model cosmic inflation. Teacher&Tips:&

7. Clarify key features and limitations of the
Have learners provide the following: demonstration:
• Similar to the Big Bang, a balloon
• Balloons
expands very rapidly at the start, then more
• Balloon pump (optional) slowly when it has already inflated. But
some evidence shows that the expansion is
• Small stickers (any design)
now accelerating again.
Instructions: • The balloon is the universe and space
itself. There is no classroom for it to expand
a. Stick small stickers randomly on the surface of the uninflated balloon.
into.
b. Quickly inflate the balloon with a pump or your breath. Observe the stickers. You may have them conduct this activity
outside of class to save time.
c. Answer the following questions:
• Why do the stickers appear to be moving away from each other?
• Are the stickers moving across the balloon?
• Do the stickers themselves grow in size?
Briefly discuss how using different instruments can enable us to detect the light of other galaxies.
This light is found to be redshifted (the light looks “stretched”). This suggests that other galaxies are
moving farther away from ours. It was later determined that they are not moving away. Instead,
space itself is expanding in all directions causing all the galaxies to be relatively farther apart. From
this “redshift” we learn how fast the universe is expanding. Redshift is the first piece of evidence for
the Big Bang model.
4
8. Focus on nucleosynthesis and how free protons and neutrons would routinely combine and separate from each other due to the high
energies at the time. Present the diagram that shows the most significant reactions that occurred. Discuss the reactions by balancing proton and
neutron count, given the compositions of the nuclei:
D = 1 p+, 1 n T = 1 p+, 2 n 3He = 2 p+, 1 n

4He = 2 p+, 2 n 7Be = 4 p+, 3 n 7Li = 3 p+, 4 n
Point out that due to the rapid cooling due to expansion, nucleosynthesis ground to a halt about three minutes after the Big Bang occurred.
This left us with mostly H isotopes (p, D and T), He isotopes and a very tiny bit of other elements like Li. The relative
abundance of He and H did not change much until today.
Figure 2. Significant nuclear reactions during Big Bang nucleosynthesis. 
5
Clarify the diagram:
• These are not the only reactions that occurred but these were the most significant.
• Given the (a, b) format in the diagram, it is a that reacts with the particle while it is b that is
produced or removed. γ is the symbol for gamma radiation.
• You may use an accounting approach to count. Place the number of each particle on each side
and balance like a money sheet:
e.g. 3He + D 4He + p+
D and T are isotopes of hydrogen namely deuterium and tritium, respectively.
9. Discuss how the relative abundance of light elements in the universe is the second piece of
evidence to prove that the Big Bang occurred. Through measurements, we find that around 24% of
the universe’s ordinary matter is currently comprised of helium, about 74% hydrogen, and 2% of
other elements. These figures only make sense if nucleosynthesis in the Big Bang model actually
occurred since no chemical process significantly changes these percentages.
10. Discuss a third part of evidence for the Big Bang model: cosmic microwave background, or the
energy (thermal radiation) that was left as a result of recombination. Atoms became neutral due to
the binding of nuclei and electrons. The remaining radiation then began to scatter. This is seen by
scientists as a faint microwave glow not emitted by any object in space.
11. Share with learners a video by Youtube animator Kurzgesagt. www.youtube.com/watch? Teacher&Tips:&
11. Learners may view the video at home.
v=wNDGgL73ihY. Inform learners that it can serve as a simple summary of the lesson that they may
refer to as a more detailed discussion of the BBT and other cosmological theories are discussed later
on.
6
PRACTICE (20 MINS)
Nucleosynthesis game
12. Emphasize nucleosynthesis by playing the following game/activity:
The objective is to go through as many nucleosynthesis reactions as possible.
Rules for each learner:
1. You must always have a particle card. If after a reaction you do not have one after a reaction,
Teacher&Tips:&
you will randomly get a neutron card (n) or proton card (p+) before the next turn starts. 12. This is an optional but recommended
2. You must find a reaction partner after each turn based on the allowed reactions on your card. activity. See Annex A for the game materials
and a detailed guide. Process the activity by
One reaction = 1 point. pointing out that the relative abundance of
3. If you are holding a neutron card (n) or proton card (p+), you may either choose to keep your elements leaves us with mostly isotopes of
card or you may swap with a partner (see Reaction List). hydrogen and helium.
4. If you are unable to find a partner to react with, you must wait until the next turn.
5. If there are two products to the reaction (ignoring γ), you must agree who gets which particle
card. If there is only one product, you must agree who gets the product card and who is left with
nothing. He or she will randomly get a neutron card (n) or proton card (p+) before the next turn
starts.
6. Honesty system: keep track of your points!
ENRICHMENT (20 MINS)

Reading of a related text: The Cosmic Connection (Outside of class)
13. The piece may be linked to or used in
13. For an assignment and as preparation for the next lesson, have learners read Carl Sagan’s The
discussions in English, Philosophy or Social
Cosmic Connection (Annex B) and answer the following guide questions: Sciences.
Understand and remember:
1. Find the meanings of the underlined words in the passage.
2. Astrology and astronomy both deal with the stars and planets. List at least three differences
between them.
Apply and analyze:
3. Why did human beings invent astrology? How do we know astrology is not a real study?
4. How does science say we are connected with the universe?
7
Evaluate:
5. Carl Sagan, the author of the essay, famously says in Paragraph 16, “We are made of star
stuff.” What do you think he meant by that?
14. You may opt to have advanced or interested learners to research on the ideas of dark matter
and dark energy. You may discuss these outside of class using the Discussion Appointments
technique.
EVALUATION (20 MINS)
Additional Exercises, Performance task to compare Steady State Theory to Big Bang model (20
minutes) Teacher&Tips:&
A. Answer Key:
A. Additional Exercises (sample questions for Written Evaluation): 1. Big Bang singularity, inflation,
nucleosynthesis, recombination
1. Arrange the stages of the Big Bang Theory: recombination, inflation, Big Bang
singularity, nucleosynthesis.
2. Given the composition of each nucleus, complete the nucleosynthesis reactions below: 2.
a. D
D = 1 p+, 1 n T = 1 p+, 2 n 3He = 2 p+, 1 n 4He = 2 p+, 2 n 7Be = 4 p+, 3 n 7Li = 3 p+, 4 n 
b. 4He
a. p+ + n +γ d. + D T + p+ c. p+
b. 3He + D + p+ e. ___ + 7Be + γ  d. n
c. 7Li + 2 He
4 e. 3He, 4He
3. Which of these is true about the Big Bang model? 3. c. Part of its proof is the amounts of H
a. The singularity is an established, well-defined part of the model. and He we have in the universe today
b. Cosmic expansion stopped at some point in time.

c. Part of its proof is the amounts of H and He we have in the universe today.
d. The Big Bang was a big explosion that threw matter into many different directions.
4. Using one to two sentences each, explain the three pieces of evidence presented for the Big 4. (answers may vary according to learner
Bang Theory: understanding)
a. Redshift b. Relative abundance c. Cosmic microwave background
8
B. Performance Task
If time and schedule permits, have groups of learners research the Steady State Theory, which is
the alternate scientific cosmological theory proposed at the time. In their output, they must:
a. Present the features of the Steady State Theory
b. Compare and contrast Steady State Theory to the Big Bang
c. Discuss the evidence that led to the Steady State Theory being discarded
Learners may present their research in the form of a poster, PowerPoint presentation, an essay,
video, or infographic. A sample rubric may be given as follows:
1 pt. 3 pts. 5 pts. Teacher&Tips:&

B. Emphasize the importance of proper
Explanation of Steady It is unclear what the The key aspects of SST Each of the aspects of research skills, citation and creative outputs
State Theory (SST) key aspects of SST are. are discussed using the SST was discussed in a throughout the task. If there is no time to
scientific terminology clear and simple way, present in class, they may present to you
and included a outside of class, or submit in a form that can
discussion of how SST be viewed independently.
was theorized.
Comparison of SST to There was little to no SST was sufficiently Each of the aspects of
the Big Bang Model comparison done. compared to BBM as a BBM are aligned or
(BBM) whole, highlighting the matched with those of
main differences. the SST, showing a
detailed understanding
of both theories.
Presentation of Little to no evidence Good evidence was The merits of BBM vs.
evidence vs. SST was given or it was presented with SST were presented
poorly argued or sufficient arguments using each piece of
related to the theory presented evidence and showed
how BBM is able to
explain a phenomena
that SST cannot.
(add creative metric)
(add other metrics)
9
As an alternative to the nucleosynthesis game (in case there is not enough time), have the learners study and analyze the given reactions to
help them answer Evaluation A2.
Chief nuclear reactions responsible for the relative abundances of light atomic nuclei observed throughout the universe.
Image retrieved from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nucleosynthesis
ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
Lineweaver, C., & Davis, T. (2005 March). Misconceptions About The Big Bang. Scientific American, 36-45.
Oakes, K. (2011 August 2). On the origin of chemical elements. Retrieved September 16, 2015, from http://blogs.scientificamerican.com/basic-
space/httpblogsscientificamericancombasic-space20110802on-the-origin-of-chemical-elements/
Sagan, C. (2000). Chapter 26: The Cosmic Connection. In J. Agel (Ed.), Carl Sagan's Cosmic Connection: An Extraterrestrial Perspective.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Wall, M. (2011, October 21). The Big Bang: What Really Happened at Our Universe's Birth? Retrieved September 15, 2015, from http://
www.space.com/13347-big-bang-origins-universe-birth.html
10
Images:
Figure 1.
History of the Universe [digital image]. (2014). Retrieved September 16, 2015 from http://bicepkeck.org/visuals.html
Figure 2.
Weiss, A. (2006). [Diagram of significant nuclear reactions]. Retrieved September 16, 2015 from http://www.einstein-online.info/en/spotlights/
BBN_phys/index.html
Video:
In a Nutshell – Kurzgesagt [kurzgesagt]. (2014 March 3). The Beginning of Everything – The Big Bang [Youtube video]. Retrieved September 16,
2015, from www.youtube.com/watch?v=wNDGgL73ihY
11
We Are All Made of Star

Stuff (Formation of the LESSON OUTLINE
Introduction Overview of the objectives and key 15
Heavy Elements) /&Review terms (5 minutes), Review of the Big
Bang and Big Bang nucleosynthesis (10
Content&Standards& minutes)
The learners demonstrate an understanding of:
Motivation The Cosmic Connection 10
1. The formation of the elements during the Big Bang and during
stellar evolution
2. The distribution of the chemical elements and the isotopes in the Instruction&/& Continuation of Big Bang into star 50
universe. Delivery formation, Discussion of star fusion and
other fusion processes
Performance&Standards&
The learners shall be able to make a creative representation of the Practice Concept map, Alpha process practice 20
historical development of the atom or the chemical element in a Brief discussion of man-made nuclei, 10
Enrichment
timeline. Presentation of performance task
Learning&Competencies& Additional Exercises, Performance task 15
Evaluation
The learners:
to present one of the man-made
1. Give evidence for and describe the formation of heavier
elements
elements during star formation and evolution (S11/12PS-IIIa-2)
2. Write the nuclear fusion reactions that take place in stars that Materials • Projector, computer
lead to the formation of new elements (S11/12PS-IIIa-3) Resources&
Describe how elements heavier than iron are formed (S11/12PS- (1) Dhaliwal, J. K. (2012a). Nucleosynthesis: Alpha Fusion in
IIIa-b-4)) Stars. [Powerpoint slides]. Retrieved from http://
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes& earthref.org/SCC/lessons/2012/nuclesosynthesis/
At the end of the lesson, the learners will be able to:
1. Briefly discuss stellar nucleosynthesis or fusion
2. Discuss other processes that led to other elements
3. Write out fusion reactions involved
12
INTRODUCTION (15 MINS) Teacher&Tips:&
prominently on one side of the classroom
Overview of the objectives and key terms (5 minutes) and refer to them frequently during
1. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the discussion.
suggested protocols (Verbatim, Own Words, Read-aloud)

a. I can give evidence for and describe the formation of
heavier elements during star formation and evolution.
b. I can write the nuclear fusion reactions that take place in
stars, which lead to the formation of new elements.
c. I can describe how elements heavier than iron are formed.
2. Introduce the following list of important terms that learners will

2. You may map out the lesson in the form
encounter: of an outline using the diagram in the
a. Fusion g. Main-sequence star Practice portion of the lesson.
b. Stellar nucleosynthesis h. Red giant

c. Proton-proton chain reaction i. Supernova explosion
d. Triple alpha process j. Supernova
nucleosynthesis
e. Alpha ladder k. R-process
f. CNO cycle l. S-process
3. Cosmic ray spallation is outside of the

REVIEW lesson’s scope. Simply explain that when
The Big Bang and Big Bang nucleosynthesis particles in cosmic rays collide with heavier
elements, they generate Li, Be and B –
3. Review the stages of the Big Bang model. Focus on
among other elements – through nuclear
nucleosynthesis and the formation of light elements such as H and fission.
He. Discuss briefly the more significant amounts of Li, Be and B that
are formed through other processes, such as cosmic ray spallation.
Emphasize that once matter recombined, gravity and other forces
brought matter together to eventually form stars 200 billion years
after the Big Bang occurred.
13
4. Review how symbols for an atom are written. Have them recall
that ,
or in terms of particle count,
The Cosmic Connection
5. Briefly discuss the selection previously given as an assignment,

Carl Sagan’s The Cosmic Connection (Sagan, 2000). Sagan found it Teacher&Tips:&
remarkable that the elements we find on Earth are also those we Use a PowerPoint presentation to discuss
the topics if possible.
find among the stars (2000). In addition, we find that most of what
we know as matter was made by processes inside stars themselves. 6. You may emphasize the rates of reaction
in the proton-proton (p-p) chain, and point
out that it will likely take a billion years
Use the Think, Pair, Share protocol and ask learners to reflect and before a specific proton is involved in a
share their thoughts on the selection. Draw out one of the theses of successful p-p fusion. 2He often
the text – We are as much a part of the universe as the stars. Discuss immediately decays back into two protons,
and rarely is a proton converted into a
how being made of stardust makes us cosmic and yet helps us neutron to form deuterium (beta-plus
realize that we are not the center of the universe. decay). However, enough make it to the
next step with billions of protons reacting.
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY (55 MINS) After discussing each of the steps, ask
Continuation of Big Bang into star formation, Discussion of star learners to give the balanced equation for
fusion and other fusion processes the formation of one 4He atom in the
proton-proton chain. The answer is as
6. Discuss how hydrogen and helium atoms in stars began
follows:
combining in nuclear fusion reactions once hydrogen-helium stars 4 1H → 4He + 2 ν + 2 e+
14
had formed from the action of gravity. This releases a tremendous
amount of light, heat, and radioactive energy. Fusion resulted in the Deuterium (D or 2H) forms from proton fusion, with one proton
formation of nuclei of new elements. These reactions inside stars are turning into a neutron via beta-plus decay, giving off a neutrino and
known as stellar nucleosynthesis. a positron:
1H + 1H → 2H + ν + e+
Figure 1. Equilibrium of the Sun and other main-sequence stars. Figure 2. The main branch of the proton-proton chain reaction (p-p
chain) resulting in the formation of 4He.
Emphasize that the first fusion process occurs in the hydrogen core
of stars such as the sun with a temperature of less than 15 million K. 3He forms from deuterium and proton fusion, also known as
These kinds of stars are called main-sequence stars. deuterium burning. This immediately consumes all deuterium
Discuss the three steps of the process known as the main-branch produced.
proton-proton chain. 2H + 1H → 3He + γ
15
4He forms from 3He fusion.
3He + 3He → 4He + 2 1H
Figure 4. The triple alpha process resulting in the formation of 12C.

(Elert, 2015b)
The entire three-step process releases about 26.7 MeV

(megaelectronvolts) of energy. Emphasize that the energy released
is responsible for the thermal pressure that pushes against gravity. It
is also responsible for the light, heat and radiation emitted by the
star. A different process facilitates hydrogen fusion in main-
sequence stars with temperature greater than 15 million K.
7. Discuss how the core of a star becomes comprised of He as H is

depleted, while H fusion only occurs in a shell around it. Due to this
process, the temperature and density of the core of the star
increases up to 100 million K. The star’s thermal pressure causes it
to push out H gas. The star balloons into a red giant.
Figure 3. A star with a very dense helium core and a hydrogen shell
expands into a red giant due to increased radiation pressure.
16
Several nuclear fusion processes occur in a red giant aside from
hydrogen fusion. The first is the triple alpha process. Alpha particles
refer to 4He. This reaction involves the fusion of three 4He atoms in Teacher&Tips:&
the following steps: 7. Don’t give the complete alpha ladder.
4He Show only the ladder until neon. Ask
+ 4He → 8Be
learners to write out the complete the alpha
8Be + 4He → 12C + γ ladder during practice later on.
Note that the 8Be intermediate is unstable, so either it decays or

forms 12C.
The star can keep growing into a supergiant as it accumulates mass.
Apha fusion processes continue in the core via the alpha ladder.
More and more alpha particles are fused to create heavier elements
all the way to iron, making the core and star itself more massive.
8. Mention that main-sequence stars hotter than 15 million K could

facilitate the production of helium once carbon was present from
alpha processes. This happens through a process where 12C is used
as a catalyst known as the carbon fusion cycle or the CNO cycle. Go
through the cycle briefly and explain that this process involves
repeated proton capture and beta-plus decay
17
p+ n Next step:
12C 6 6 Add a proton
13N 7 6 Convert a proton
13C 6 7 Add a proton
14N 7 7 Add a proton
15O 8 7 Convert a proton
15N 7 8 Add a proton
12C 6 6
4He 2 2
9. Finally, share how a star will eventually be unable to generate

energy to push against gravity due to the formation of heavier
elements, thus causing it to collapse on itself. It then undergoes a
supernova explosion that releases a tremendous amount of energy
Figure 5. The CNO cycle, which uses 12C as a catalyst to form more
enough to synthesize elements heavier than iron. Examples of these
4He in larger or hotter main-sequence stars.
elements are uranium and thorium, which are some of the heaviest
known elements. This is done through the r-process that involves
rapid capture of neutrons by the atom. Other heavy elements are
also synthesized through s-
process involving slow
Teach this in a way that accounts for the number of protons and Teacher&Tips:&
neutron capture in red
neutrons in each step: 9. r-process and s-process need not be
giants. discussed at length. Just mention that these
processes change the atom’s atomic weight,
after which the atom undergoes various
decay processes to change its identity.
18
PRACTICE (20 MINS)
Concept map, Alpha process practice. Teacher&Tips:&
10. Alternately, this concept map may be
10. Review the lesson using the following concept map. The map used at the start of the lesson to guide
should initially have mostly blank spaces. Ask the learners to learners with all the terms.
complete the diagram by filling in missing terms.
Figure 6. Concept map for the current lesson.
11. Learners should notice that mostly even-

11. Have learners write all the equations involved in the alpha numbered elements emerge through the
ladder using the periodic table provided. Ask what they notice alpha ladder. They need to account for
about the atomic number patterns of the elements found in the other elements between carbon and iron in
ladder. Explain that this feature of the alpha ladder, as well as other other ways.
rules of stability, results in the odd-numbered elements being less

19
abundant than the even-numbered elements beside them on the
periodic table. Emphasize that many other processes allowed for
the odd-numbered elements, including supernova nucleosynthesis,
radioactive decay, electron and neutron capture, nuclear fission, and
cosmic ray spallation.
Brief discussion of man-made nuclei, Presentation of Performance task.
12. Mention that quite a few elements were first discovered as man-made elements since many of
them did not emerge from the major nucleosynthesis reactions (or their minor processes). These
include elements Americium through Lawrencium, as well as some of the recently discovered
elements like Flerovium and Livermorium. Assign the learners to research on one of these elements
after class to be used for the Performance Task.

Additional Exercises, Performance task to present one of the man-made elements.
Teacher&Tips:&
A. Additional Exercises (sample questions for Written Evaluation): A. Answer Key:
1. Which of the following processes is likely to generate the heaviest element? 1. b. r-process
a. CNO cycle b. r-process
c. triple-alpha process d. Big Bang nucleosynthesis
2. Which of the following reactions is not a part of the alpha ladder?

2. b.
3. If an element is used up by a star in fusion, it is sometimes called “burning” even though no
20
Teacher&Tips:&
actual combustion occurs. Which of the following processes is likely to involve “carbon burning”?
3. a. alpha ladder (CNO cycle does not
a. alpha ladder b. CNO cycle consume any carbon; it simply uses carbon
as a catalyst)
c. triple-alpha process d. s-process
4. a. heavier
4. Modified True or False: If the statement is true, write True. Else, replace the underlined portion
b. supernova
with the correct word or phrase. c. True
a. A star gets lighter as time goes on. d. True
b. Most of the heaviest elements were formed in main-sequence stars.

c. The heavy elements in a star are found in its core.
d. In stellar nucleosynthesis, heavier elements are formed from combining lighter ones.
B. Performance Task
Learners will create an output that discusses the origin of one of the man-made elements. In their B. Emphasize the importance of proper
research skills and citation throughout the
output, they must:
task, even with creative outputs. If there is
• discuss the element’s basic characteristics no time to present in class, they may
present outside of class directly to you, or
• give a brief timeline leading up to the element’s discovery submit in a form that can be viewed
separately.
21
Learners may present their research in the form of a poster, PowerPoint, essay, video, or infographic.
1 pt. 3 pts. 5 pts.
Presentation of the Most basic characteristics of Basic aspects of the Unique aspects of the
element’s characteristics the element are missing or element that can be found element (e.g. the element’s
absent. on the periodic table are potential significance or
present. uses) were presented
Timeline of the element’s There is no clear chain of The scientific history of the The element’s history was
discovery events or key moments element’s discovery was presented clearly and the
presented. made clear, including process of creating the
notable people and groups element was discussed.
involved.
(add creative metric)
(add other metrics)
OTHER RESOURCES:
Dhaliwal, J. K. (2012b). Nucleosynthesis: Heavier Elements. [Powerpoint slides]. Retrieved from http://earthref.org/SCC/lessons/2012/
nucleosynthesis/
Nave, C. R. (2012). Nuclear fusion in stars. Retrieved September 23, 2015 from http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/astro/astfus.html
Penovich, K. (n.d.). Formation of the High Mass Elements. Retrieved September 23, 2015, from http://aether.lbl.gov/www/tour/elements/stellar/
stellar_a.html
22
Images:
Figure 1.
Equilibrium of the Sun [illustration]. (2007 August). Retrieved September 24, 2015 from http://lasp.colorado.edu/education/outerplanets/
solsys_star.php#nuclear
Figure 2.
Elert, G. (2015a). Proton-proton chain (main branch) [diagram]. Retrieved September 23, 2015 from http://physics.info/nucleosynthesis/
Figure 3.
Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation (CSIRO). (2015). Hydrogen Shell Burning on the Red Giant Branch [illustration].
Retrieved September 24, 2015 from http://www.atnf.csiro.au/outreach//education/senior/astrophysics/stellarevolution_postmain.html
Figure 4.
Elert, G. (2015b). Triple alpha process [diagram]. Retrieved September 23, 2015 from http://physics.info/nucleosynthesis/
Figure 5.
Elert, G. (2015c). Carbon nitrogen oxygen cycle [diagram]. Retrieved September 23, 2015 from http://physics.info/nucleosynthesis/
23
Atomos, Aristotle and Alchemy

(Chemistry Before LESSON OUTLINE
Modern History) Introduction Overview of the objectives and key
/&Review names or terms
10
Content&Standards& Motivation The Gnome theory of physics 10

The learners demonstrate an understanding of:
1. How the concept of the atom evolved from Ancient Greek to the present Instruction&/& Atomism; non-atomistic views of the 65
2. How the concept of the element evolved from Ancient Greek to the present Delivery Greeks; The growth of alchemy across
different civilizations, Western Alchemy
The learners shall be able to make a creative representation of the historical Practice Concentric Circles review of the lesson 20
development of the atom or the chemical element in a timeline.
Enrichment Reading of a related text: Lead to Gold,
Learning&Competencies& Sorcery to Science
The learners to:
Evaluation Additional Exercises, Written Outputs: 15
1. Describe the ideas of the Ancient Greeks on the atom (S11/12PS-IIIa-b-5)
Essay and concept mapping
2. Describe the ideas of the Ancient Greeks on the elements (S11/12PS-IIIa-
b-6) Materials • Projector, computer, speakers
3. Describe the contributions of the alchemists to the science of chemistry
Resources&
(S11/12PS-IIIb-7) (1) Coyne, Glynis L. (2012). Lead to Gold, Sorcery to Science:
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes& Alchemy and the Foundations of Modern Chemistry. University
At the end of the lesson, the learners will be able to: of North Carolina PIT Journal, 4. Retrieved October 10, 2015
from http://pitjournal.unc.edu/article/lead-gold-sorcery-science-
1. Discuss key developments in the concept of the atom and element
alchemy-and-foundations-modern-chemistry;
throughout pre-modern history
(2) see additional resources at the end of the lesson
2. Discuss key developments in the practical application of chemistry
throughout pre-modern history.
3. Articulate the contributions of alchemy as a protoscience to chemistry.
24
Overview of the objectives and key names or terms

1. Go back to the outline presented at the introduction of the quarter. Let the learners take note
of how our understanding of matter has changed and continues to change after discussing where
all matter came from.

2. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim, prominently on one side of the classroom
Own Words, Read-aloud) and refer to them frequently during
discussion.
a. I can describe the ideas of the Ancient Greeks on the atom.
b. I can describe the ideas of the Ancient Greeks on the elements.
c. I can describe the contributions of the alchemists to the science of chemistry.
3. Introduce the following list of some important names and terms that learners will encounter:
a. Leucippus and Democritus d. Jabir Ibn-Hayyan (Geber)
b. Atomism e. Alchemy
c. Aristotle f. Protoscience
The Gnome theory of physics.
4. Present the amusing and absurd *gnome theory of physics that says the universe can be
explained entirely by the actions and effects of tiny versions of gnomes (duwende in Philippine
mythology). For example:
• Gravity – gnomes like the ground. Gnomes throw small invisible ropes to the ground.
These ropes attach to unseen hooks that enable muscle-toned gnomes to pull themselves
toward the ground. There is minimal gravity far from planetary bodies (i.e. in space) because
25
Teacher&Tips:&
gnomes don’t have cables long enough for them. All bodies experience gravitational 4. Pretend you believe the theory as a true
explanation of matter during presentation.
attraction to each other quite simply because gnomes are, to put it mildly, sociable creatures. See more aspects of the theory posted
• Light – gnomes that make up our eyes can see what color hats other gnomes are wearing online
to make up, say, a table. They then hi-five gnomes in our 'optical nerve' who run to tell the (http://uncyclopedia.wikia.com/wiki/
Physics_doesn't_exist,_it's_all_about_Gnom
brain gnomes what they have seen. This makes us think we are seeing a table when in fact, es). Encourage learners to think critically in
it's all gnomes. order to point out holes in the theory. Draw
• States of matter – a solid is little more than a closely compacted configuration of gnomes out the point of the parody theory that just
because an idea of things can be explained
all holding hands, wearing hats and having legs. Heating causes gnomes to become excited does NOT mean it is true.
or tickled. They start to loosen their grip of their neighbors (liquid). When gnomes are
tickled, they are no longer able to hold on and just float away in groups of one or more (gas). *This can be presented through a power
Sometimes the gnomes get so excited they catch fire (plasma). point presentation.
5. Explain that much of our thinking about the universe began in the same way, that is, with many
different ideas and conjectures. Without the necessary scientific tools or discipline, much of what
was known about matter and the universe in the pre-modern era was a result of discussion,
reflection, and trial-and-error. There were very little evidences or experimentation involved in
finding explanations. This made developing scientific ideas about matter quite difficult. However,
the human need to master our surroundings led to many developments in terms of the practical
understanding of matter and materials.
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY (65 MINS)
Atomism, non-atomistic views of the Greeks, the growth of alchemy across different civilizations,
Western Alchemy
6. Introduce the Greek philosophers who began considering the nature of what things were made
of. They were preoccupied with how the universe seemed to be both changing and constant.
Leucippus and Democritus were two of the most important theorists about the natural and
physical world. They were called physicists in Ancient Greece. They considered the idea of
atomism, or the idea that things are made up of much smaller things that cannot be changed nor
divided. Among the features of their theory were the following:
26
• Atoms make up most of the things in the universe; where there are no atoms, there is a void. Teacher&Tips:&
• Atoms are incredibly small and cannot be divided, hence atomos (uncuttable). 6. Learners should already have a concept
of the atom from previous years’
• Atoms themselves are solid, homogeneous and cannot change.
discussions. Ask them to compare the
• Atoms moving about and colliding in the void cause the changes we see in our universe. atomists’ ideas to our current scientific
knowledge of the atom using a Venn
• The shapes, sizes and weights of individual atoms influence the characteristics of the thing
diagram. They can also use This can also
they make up; e.g. sharp atoms cause our tongues to tear and make bitter or sour tastes, and serve as pre-assessment regarding their
atoms that compose clay are joined by flexible joints which harden when the clay is baked. understanding of the modern atomic theory.
A power point presentation or pictures can

Emphasize that atomism, although more a philosophical idea than a scientific one was closest to our be used as instructional tools for all topics in
current thinking about matter. Despite having advocates, atomism was set aside because more this session.
prominent philosophers opposed it. Religious groups later declared it as heretical or blasphemous
because they deemed atomistic thinking denied the existence of God.
Discuss how many correct scientific ideas are unpopular or often disregarded. Cite the treatment of
scientists and thinkers like Galileo or Gregor Mendel who were ridiculed or ostracized for advocating
what we now consider to be truth. Discuss and analyze with the class why some people, even today,
refuse to accept scientifically sound concepts like climate change and evolution.
7. Emphasize that the concepts of Greek
philosophers and atomists on the world
7. Discuss some of the ideas that served as arguments against atomism and what this revealed
were simply a result of reasoning and
about how the Greeks thought about matter and the world: thought. They were not necessarily scientific
• The philosopher Anaxagoras argued that there was an infinite number of elementary natural or empirical.
substances in the form of infinitesimally small particles that combined to comprise the different
As an optional (and fun) activity, you may
things in the universe. show or refer learners to a game online
• Another theory by a philosopher named Empedocles stated that everything is made up of called Little Alchemy (https://
littlealchemy.com/). An alternative is Doodle
four eternal and unchanging kinds of matter, fire, air (all gases), water (all liquids and metals)
God (http://www.addictinggames.com/
and earth (all solids). puzzle-games/doodle-god-game.jsp). In this
• The well-known philosopher Plato further expanded Empedocles’ theory by saying each of game, learners get to understand the
thinking popularized by Aristotle and the
the four kinds of matter is composed of geometrical solids (the “Platonic solids”) further
alchemists – combining any of the four
divisible into triangles. When rearranged, these triangles could cause the apparent elements in certain ways resulted in
transformations between the four basic kinds of matter. substances that could be combined further.
• Aristotle, on the other hand, believed that the four elements could be balanced in
27
substances in an infinite number of ways, and that when combined gave proportions of
“essential qualities,” hot, dry, cold and wet. Transformations between the four elements (or
changes in their balance in a substance) caused changes in the universe.
Emphasize that it was an obsession with Aristotle’s ideas (and his arguments against atomists) that
prevented atomism from gaining ground.
Teacher&Tips:&
8. Enrich the discussion by showing pictures
8. Explain that while our concept of matter didn’t advance much during this time, the practical of each of these civilizations and the
aspect of dealing with substances, matter and materials flourished in different civilizations before and products of their technological advances.
Emphasize that contrary to Euro-centric
after the Greeks:
historical perspectives, science at this time
• The Mesopotamians had techniques to utilize metals like gold and copper. They even was enriched mostly by people outside of
assigned certain symbols to match metals with the heavenly bodies such as the Sun and Moon. Europe and the West.
They also made use of other materials such as dyes, glass, paints, and perfumes.
• The Egyptians adapted techniques from the Mesopotamians and perfected the use of
bronze, dye and glass that the Greeks later copied.
• The Chinese also had their own processes for metalwork and ceramic materials, but they
especially focused on finding minerals, plants and substances that could prolong life. Some of
the substances discovered in Chinese medicine have been found to have actual positive effects
while others were found useless or even harmful, like mercury.
• The Indians, like the Chinese, had a kind of alchemy (rasayana) that looked at different
substances and practices for Vedic medicine. This is tied closely to Hindu and Buddhist beliefs.
They also perfected the use of iron and steel and were well-known manufacturers of dyes,
glass, cement, solutions for textiles, and soap.
• The Arabs and Muslims enriched not only the practice but also the literature of chemistry. In
particular, the scholar Jabir Ibn-Hayyan, also known as Geber, translated the practices and
Aristotelian thinking of the Greeks and wrote extensively on how metals can be purified. He
came up with the preparation of acids such as nitric, hydrochloric and sulfuric acids, as well as
aqua regia (nitro-hydrochloric acid).
28
Emphasize that despite many of the progress being practical, much of it was shrouded in mysticism
or cultural beliefs, and was often a result of trial and error. These advances in materials, metallurgy
and medicine would often be collectively referred to in history as alchemy, from the Arabic/Greek
alkīmiyā or “the art of transmuting.”
Teacher&Tips:&
9. The field of alchemy became popular in the Western world because of Aristotle’s ideas on the 9. After discussing what alchemy is, you may
elements and the techniques developed by other civilizations. Alchemists tried to play with the present pictures or presentations of
balance of the four elements (fire, water, air, earth) and three principles (salt, sulfur and mercury) to alchemy in popular culture, such as in the
transform or transmute substances. Among their aims was to try and transform “impure” or “base” fantasy novel, Harry Potter and the
Philosopher’s Stone and the Japanese
metals like lead or iron into the “purer” metals of silver or gold, discover a magical “Philosopher’s anime, Fullmetal Alchemist. Point out how
Stone,” and produce the so-called “Elixir of Life.” With a T-chart, distinguish how alchemy both these fictional stories tend to focus on the
contributed to and hampered scientific thought. fantastical or esoteric aspect of alchemy and
not so much the scientific.
Scientific Contributions Unscientific Contributions
refined how to crystallize, condense, distill, used incantations, magic spells and symbols
evaporate and dissolve metals and materials
took lots of notes and information about what used esoteric symbols connected to astrology and
they did religion
developed step-by-step procedures and concerned with riches, purity, immortality, and
specialized set-ups or equipment spirits
discovered and investigated the properties of promoted the Aristotelian concept of the
many now-useful substances such as phosphorus, elements
sulfur and potash
Stress that in the pre-modern era, the understanding of chemistry was distinct from the practice of
chemistry. Summarize by pointing out that while alchemists had the wrong understanding of matter,
much of what they did set the stage for much of modern chemistry. For this reason, alchemy is Protoscience - An unscientific field of study
considered a protoscience, a precursor that allowed the field of chemistry to be what it is today. which later developed into real science (e.g.
astrology toward astronomy and alchemy
toward chemistry).
29
PRACTICE (20 MINS)
Concentric Circles review of the lesson.

Teacher&Tips:&
10. As a quick post-assessment, call on
10. Review the lesson by asking the learners to discuss what they have learned. Using the
different learners to express in their own
Concentric Circles technique found in http://www.theteachertoolkit.com/index.php/tool/inside- words the answers to the questions.
outside-circles, ask them to work with different partners to answer each of the following questions:
a. What are the aspects of Leucippus and Democritus’ idea of atomism?
b. How did other Greek philosophers like Plato and Aristotle think about the elements?
c. What were the three aims of Western alchemy?
d. Give two similar advances in alchemy carried out by different civilizations.
e. Give an example of how the contributions of alchemy can be found in the modern chemistry
laboratory.
ENRICHMENT
Reading of related text outside of class: Lead to Gold, Sorcery to Science
11. Encourage additional reading on alchemy as contributing to science. In preparation for the next 11. The piece touches on the continuation
lesson, and as additional insight into how alchemy impacted chemistry, instruct learners to read of atomic theory through Boyle’s proposed
“corpuscles.” You may use this important
Annex A, which is an adapted excerpt of an article, Lead to Gold, Sorcery to Science: Alchemy and connection to segue into the next topic.
the Foundations of Modern Chemistry. Have them answer the following questions:
Apply and analyze:
2. How can we say that alchemy is integral in the definition of chemistry?
3. Why did Boyle engage with alchemy even though he disagreed with it?
Evaluate:
4. Many great minds of the time like Isaac Newton engaged in the practice of alchemy. Does
this make Isaac Newton less of a scientist? Argue why or why not.
30
5. The Nobel Prize in physiology or medicine for 2015 was awarded in part to a Chinese woman
named Tu Youyou for discovering artemisinin, an antimalarial substance. She began her work by
looking at traditional Chinese medicine. How is traditional Chinese medicine (herbal medicine,
acupuncture and acupressure) similar to alchemy?
Additional Exercises, Writing Outputs: Essay and concept mapping.
Teacher&Tips:&
A. Additional Exercises (possible questions for Written Evaluation):
1. Which of the following was not part of the ideas of Leucippus and Democritus? A. Answer Key:
a. The universe is made up of either atoms or a void. 1. c. The universe is made up of four
elements that combine and separate to
b. An object is made of small, indivisible parts which influence the object’s properties. cause change.
c. The universe is made up of four elements that combine and separate to cause change.
d. The universe changes because atoms move about, combine, collide and separate. 2. A physicist in Ancient Greece was
somebody who theorized and thought
about the natural and physical world.
2. What did physicist mean in Ancient Greece?
Pseudoscience is a claim, belief, or practice
presented as scientific, but which does not
B. Written output questions (longer Essay-type or synthesis questions for Written Evaluation) adhere to the scientific method.
1. How is a protoscience like alchemy similar or different from a pseudoscience like astrology or e.g. homeopathy
homeopathy?
You have the option to limit the evaluation
items if there is time constraint.
2. Create a concept map beginning from each of the words below. Each map should contain at
least 30 connected concepts each.
a. atomism
b. alchemy
31
ADDITIONAL RESOURCES:
Fowler, M. (2008 August 23). Early Greek Science: Thales to Plato. Lecture. Retrieved October 1, 2015 from http://
galileoandeinstein.physics.virginia.edu/lectures/thales.pdf
Fruen, L. (2010). The History of Ancient Chemistry. Retrieved October 7, 2015 from http://realscience.breckschool.org/upper/fruen/files/
Enrichmentarticles/files/History.html
Shuttleworth, M. (2010 June 17). Alchemy and the Philosopher’s Stone. Retrieved October 7, 2015 from https://explorable.com/alchemy
Shuttleworth, M. (2010 May 25). Ancient Chinese Alchemy. Retrieved October 9, 2015 from https://explorable.com/chinese-alchemy
Shuttleworth, M. (2010 November 23). Islamic Alchemy. Retrieved October 9, 2015 from https://explorable.com/islamic-alchemy
Ancient Atomism. (2011 November 18). In Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy. Retrieved October 7, 2015 from http://plato.stanford.edu/
entries/atomism-ancient/
Atomic Structure from Democritus to Dalton. (n.d.). Retrieved October 7, 2015 from http://www.chemteam.info/AtomicStructure/Democritus-to-
Dalton.html
The Greek Concept of Atomos: The Indivisible Atom. (n.d.). Retrieved October 7, 2015 from http://www.chemteam.info/AtomicStructure/
Greeks.html
Physics doesn’t exist, it’s all about Gnomes. (2013 December 16). Retrieved October 10, 2015 from http://uncyclopedia.wikia.com/wiki/
Physics_doesn't_exist,_it's_all_about_Gnomes
Activities:
Koziol, J. (n.d.). Little Alchemy [online game]. Retrieved October 9, 2015 from https://littlealchemy.com/
32
Elite Games Studio. (2010, July 30). Doodle God [online game]. Retrieved October 9, 2015 from http://www.addictinggames.com/puzzle-
games/doodle-god-game.jsp
33
Not Indivisible (The Structure of the

Atom) LESSON OUTLINE
Content&Standards& Introduction Overview of the objectives and key 10
The learners demonstrate an understanding of: /&Review names or terms
1. How the concept of the atom evolved from Ancient Greek to the present Motivation 4 Pictures, 1 Word (10 minutes); Brief 20
2. How the concept of the element evolved from Ancient Greek to the present discussion of billiard ball concept and
Brownian motion (10 minutes)
The learners shall be able to make a creative representation of the historical Instruction&/& Discussion of 4 atomic models: plum- 80
development of the atom or the chemical element in a timeline. Delivery pudding, Rutherford, Bohr (40 minutes)
and quantum models (40 minutes)
The learners to: Practice Demonstration of distance between 20
1. Point out the main ideas in the discovery of the structure of the atom and nucleus and electrons; summary of four
its subatomic particles (S11/12PS-IIIb-8) models
2. Cite the contributions of J.J. Thomson, Ernest Rutherford, Henry Moseley,
and Niels Bohr to the understanding of the structure of the atom Enrichment Quarks and other subatomic particles 10
(S11/12PS-IIIb-9)
3. Describe the nuclear model of the atom and the location of its major Evaluation Attribution of aspects and concepts to 10
components (protons, neutrons, and electrons) (S11/12PS-IIIb-10) correct models
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes& Materials Projector, computer, pictures of each of
At the end of the lesson, the learners shall be able to: the models, map of the Philippines
1. Discuss key developments in the concept of the atomic structure
Resources&
2. Give brief explanations of each of the models of atomic structure (1) Gagnon, S. (n.d.) How much of an atom is empty space?
Retrieved November 17, 2015 from http://education.jlab.org/
qa/how-much-of-an-atom-is-empty-space.html;
34
and refer to them frequently during
Own Words, Read-aloud)
discussion.
a. I can point out the main ideas in the discovery of the structure of the atom and its
subatomic particles.
b. I can cite the contributions of J.J. Thomson, Ernest Rutherford, Henry Moseley, and Niels
Bohr to the understanding of the structure of the atom.
c. I can describe the nuclear model of the atom and the location of its major components
(protons, neutrons, and electrons).
2. Introduce the following list of some important terms and names that learners will encounter: 2. Inform the class that a lot of scientists’
a. Billiard ball g. Protons names will be mentioned in discussing
models of atomic structure, and that they
b. JJ Thomson h. Niels Bohr should focus on the differences in their
c. Electrons i. Quantum model proposed models.
d. Plum-pudding model j. James Chadwick

e. Ernest Rutherford k. Neutrons
f. Nucleus

4 Pictures, 1 Word
3. Begin with a 4 Pictures, 1 Word type game that will introduce the subject to be discussed. See
the image to the right.
Inform that class that you will discuss quite a few names and concepts. While it will be good to
keep track of the names of the scientists, it will be more useful to pay attention as to which
concepts belong to which models.
35
Teacher&Tips:&
3. The answer is ATOM. You may do similar

motivations as a review for previous lessons.
Figure 1. 4 Pics 1 Word game: ATOM
REVIEW (10 MINS)

Brief discussion of billiard ball concept and Brownian motion
4. Remind the class that before Dalton, most atomists like Democritus and advocates of atomic
theory believed that the atom was a fundamental, indestructible, indivisible particle. This is A power point presentation may be used as
an instructional tool to discuss this topic.
sometimes known as the billiard ball concept of the atom, wherein the atom is an incredibly small
but smooth and whole object.
5. Briefly mention how a botanist named Robert Brown observed, under a microscope, that pollen
suspended in water ejected particles that caused a jittery, irregular motion. This would later be
36
called Brownian motion. Later on in the 20th century, this observation would be used by Albert
Einstein and a French physicist, Jean Perrin, to mathematically and experimentally confirm John
Dalton’s Chemical Atomic Theory. This made the atom an undeniable part of how we thought about
the universe. The atom is no longer debatable, the way it was in the time of the Greeks, the
alchemists and Lavoisier.

Discussion of 4 atomic models: plum-pudding, Rutherford, Bohr
Teacher&Tips:&
6. Proceed with the discussion by saying that before Dalton clearly defined what an atom was, few 6. Many of these important figures are
had even considered what an atom looked like, what the nature of the atom itself was, or if it was physicists, not chemists. Encourage a side
composed of anything at all. Throughout the 19th century, scientists experimented quantitatively discussion of how Physics is so tied to
Chemistry in the study of matter and
with electricity and electric charges. Michael Faraday related electricity to atoms by saying, “...if we
changes in matter. This can be a separate
adopt the atomic theory or phraseology, then the atoms of bodies which are equivalent to each Enrichment activity.
other in their ordinary chemical action, have equal quantities of electricity associated with them.”
Later in 1897, Joseph John Thomson published the idea that electricity was in particles that were
part of the atom. Experimenting with cathode rays, he established the mass and charge properties of
these particles. These particles were named electrons. In 1904, he came up with the plum-pudding
model, which was an idea of what the atom looked like based on his experiments.
He would later conclude that the electron was not the only source of mass in the atom. This implied
that the atom was composed of other particles.
37
Figure 2. Thomson’s plum-pudding model, a sphere with a uniformly distributed positive charge and
enough embedded electrons to neutralize the positive charge. A plum pudding is a sort of cake with
raisins embedded in it. Teacher&Tips:&
7. Introduce Ernest Rutherford, a student of Thomson’s, who was among many who studied 7. Get learners to understand how scientists
determine if a mode or theory is better fit
radioactivity. He concluded that radioactivity occurred due to changes on a subatomic level, or
over another. Rutherford’s model was
changes within the atom itself. In 1902, he worked in Thomson’s laboratory where he distinguished preferred over Thomson’s. It was not
two kinds of radiation based on their penetrating power: α (alpha) and β (beta). He studied these because Thomson was wrong, but that his
types of radiation and noticed, from his experiments, that alpha particles would sometimes bounce model was not sufficient to explain the
phenomena of alpha particles rebounding.
off at a high angle when made to penetrate a very thin gold foil.
Rutherford’s model added insight that
explained the experimental phenomena.
38
Figure 3. Diagram of the Rutherford atomic model. Physicist Ernest Rutherford envisioned the atom as like a miniature solar system, with
electrons orbiting around a massive nucleus, and as mostly empty space, with the nucleus occupying only a very small part of the atom.
In 1911, Rutherford theorized that the model proposed by Thomson did not explain the deflection of alpha particles. Therefore, he devised his
own model with a positive nucleus at the center and electrons revolving like planets at a distance around it. The incredibly dense nucleus
explained the occasional deflection experienced by the alpha particles, while the amounts of empty space in between explained why most
particles were able to pass through.
Rutherford later concluded that the nucleus was composed of positive particles known as protons, which were then thought to be hydrogen
nuclei found in other atoms. He suggested the possibility of finding a composite particle (proton + electron) with a negligible electric field that
composed the nucleus.
39
8. Introduce the next key figure, Niels Bohr, another scientist in Rutherford’s laboratory. He tackled one of the big issues with the Rutherford
model in 1913. The system proposed by Rutherford was unstable because, under classical physics, the spinning electrons would tend to be
attracted to the positive nucleus and lose energy until they collapse into the center. Bohr proposed that the electrons existed only at fixed
distances from the nucleus at set “energy levels,” or quanta. Quanta was first conceptualized mathematically by Max Planck. Bohr also
proposed that the electrons “jumped” between energy levels by absorbing or releasing discrete amounts of energy.
However, the Bohr model of the atom was still unable to explain why atoms bonded in certain ways to form compounds. For example, carbon
formed compounds of CH4 while oxygen formed H2O.
Figure 4. In the Bohr model of the atom, electrons travel in defined circular orbits around the nucleus. The orbits are labeled by an integer, the
quantum number n. Electrons can jump from one orbit to another by emitting or absorbing energy.
40
PRACTICE (20 MINS)
Demonstration of distance between nucleus and electrons
9. Help learners visualize the Rutherford’s or Bohr’s model wherein most of the matter is
concentrated in the nucleus with no matter in between.
The Scale of Empty Space in the Rutherford/Bohr Atomic Models

The hydrogen nucleus has a radius of approximately 0.84 x 10-15 m. The atom itself (defined as the Teacher&Tips:&
diameter of the spherical electron cloud) has a radius of 0.529 x 10-10 m. Compute the difference
between the orders of magnitude between the two. To get the order of magnitude, simply
divide the order of the scientific notation
(e.g. divide 10-15 by 10-10 to get the
Using the Rutherford or Bohr models, how far would the electron be if our nucleus was a ball with a answer, 100,000 orders of magnitude).
radius of 0.84 m (half as tall as an average Filipino)? Project or display a map of the Philippines.
Ensure the scale of the map reaches up to
100 kilometers. If a giant 2m nucleus ball
Answer: The electron would most likely be a tiny pellet 52.9 kilometers away from the nucleus ball. was stuck on top of Rizal’s monument in
Luneta Park, the tiny electron would only be
found as far as Tagaytay. From a nucleus in
How far away on a map is 52.9 km? Baguio, an electron would be found in
Calasiao, Pangasinan, from a nucleus ball
near Davao City, an electron in Kidapawan.
Quantum Models
10. When showing pictures of the quantum

10. Continue the lesson by discussing the development of a new branch of physics called quantum model (and shapes of orbitals), emphasize
mechanics. This branch augmented the Bohr model with new explanations of how matter behaved that the depicted electron clouds are not
actually “clouds,” but rather regions of
at a very tiny level that turned it into the quantum model of the atom used today. The model is
probability that are described by math.
based on mathematical equations by several scientists, including Werner Heisenberg and Ernest
Schrödinger.
• Instead of electrons being particles in the model, electrons have characteristics of both
waves and particles.
41
• Instead of orbits, there were orbitals or regions of space with high probability of finding Teacher&Tips:&
electrons. These are sometimes known as electron clouds or electron subshells whose shapes It is difficult to determine the exact location
are described by complex wave equations. of an electron in an atom. One can only
calculate the probability where it is found. It
• There is no real “empty space,” but there are regions with a high or low probability of
is for this reason that the electron in the
finding an electron. quantum model is described in terms of
The quantum model more accurately explains properties of elements such as the way that its probability distribution or
probability density. This probability
atoms bond with one another. However, it made Rutherford’s proposal of composite proton-
distribution does not have definite
electron particles unworkable. This is because the equations would predict that there was a boundaries. Its edges are somewhat fuzzy,
zero probability of electrons being found in the nucleus. The mass unaccounted for by the hence, the term "electron cloud."
protons had to come from another particle entirely.
11. James Chadwick was a student of Rutherford’s who built on this possibility in 1926. He worked 11. Clarify that nuclear science and the
concept of radioactivity existed prior to
on radiation emitted by beryllium that took the form of particles heavy enough to displace protons.
Chadwick’s confirmation of the neutron, but
These particles were as heavy as protons, but they needed to have a neutral charge that would allow his discovery made it easier to study
them to smash into the nucleus without being repelled by electrons or protons. He confirmed their because the neutron was used in a lot of
existence by measuring their mass and called them neutrons. He determined that they were single nuclear reactions.
particles instead of composite ones that Rutherford had hypothesized.
The neutron was able to explain the mass unaccounted for by a system of protons and electrons
only. It also allowed for more far-reaching advancements in nuclear physics and chemistry. It gave an
understanding of isotopes and radioactive decay, and provided the tools to synthesize new elements
and radioactive materials. These advancements, for better or for worse, changed the landscape of
science because they gave us the ability to derive large amounts of energy from splitting the atom
(nuclear fission).
PRACTICE (20 MINS)
Summary of four models
12. Have each learner draw the four models discussed (Thomson/plum-pudding, Rutherford, Bohr,
quantum) on a matrix like the one below. Ask learners to label these models with relevant concepts.
42
Teacher&Tips:&
Plum-Pudding / Thomson’s Model Rutherford’s Model
12. During the activity, remind learners that
models are useful representations to
understand real things, but they are not a
statement of fact or actual appearance.
This Practice may also be given as an

assignment or assessment to save on time.
Bohr’s Model Quantum Model
13. Display the following infographic that neatly summarizes what knowledge was added by each
model of atomic structure, and what questions each model raised.
43
Teacher&Tips:&
To get the order of magnitude, simply

divide the order of the scientific notation
(e.g. divide 10-15 by 10-10 to get the
answer, 100,000 orders of magnitude).
Project or display a map of the

Philippines. Ensure the scale of the map
reaches up to 100 kilometers. If a giant
2m nucleus ball was stuck on top of Rizal’s
monument in Luneta Park, the tiny
electron would only be found as far as
Tagaytay. From a nucleus in Baguio, an
electron would be found in Calasiao,
Pangasinan, from a nucleus ball near
Davao City, an electron in Kidapawan.
Figure 5. Historical development of the model of atomic theory with contributions from Dalton to
Chadwick.
44
Quarks and other subatomic particles Teacher&Tips:&
14. Encourage additional reading on the

14. Share that further study of the atom led scientists to discover that even the subatomic protons
subject. One sample resource is Wacky
and neutrons were made of even smaller particles called quarks. These quarks have “flavors” such as Physics: Why Do Particles Have Flavors?
Top, Bottom, Up, Down, Strange, and Charm. (See the Sources for this Teaching Guide)
Another text reading suggestion:

EVALUATION (10 MINS) Quark - Subatomic Particle.
Retrieved May 22, 2016 from http://
Attribution of aspects and concepts to correct models www.britannica.com/science/quark
A. Check which model applies to each attribute. There may be more than one applicable model
per item.
Plum- Rutherford Bohr Quantum

pudding or  A. Correct answers provided in matrix.
Thomson
Conceptualized following
cathode ray experiments
Has a nucleus
Has energy levels or quanta
Conceptualized following α-
particle experiments
Explains why electrons don’t

fall into the nucleus
Has idea of orbitals
First model to use idea of

!
subatomic particles
(others may be added) 45

Gagnon, S. (n.d.) How much of an atom is empty space? Retrieved November 17, 2015 from http://education.jlab.org/qa/how-much-of-an-
atom-is-empty-space.html
Giunta, C. (2010). Atoms are Divisible: The Pieces Have Pieces. In C. Giunta (Ed.), Atoms in Chemistry: From Dalton's Predecessors to Complex
Atoms and Beyond (pp. 65-81), ACS Symposium Series 1044. American Chemical Society: Washington, DC.
Bohr atomic model. (2015). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/science/Bohr-
atomic-model
Chadwick discovers the neutron. (1998). Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/aso/databank/entries/dp32ne.html
Chronology of Discoveries in Atomic Structure. (n.d.) Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.chemteam.info/AtomicStructure/Hist-
AtomicStructure.pdf
Henry Moseley. (2014, December 29). Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.famousscientists.org/henry-moseley/
James Chadwick. (2014, September 8). Retrieved November 17, 2015 from http://www.famousscientists.org/james-chadwick/
Rutherford atomic model. (2015). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/science/
Rutherford-atomic-model
Thomson atomic model. (2015). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/science/
Thomson-atomic-model
46
Additional reading:
Moskowitz, C. (2012, January 26). Wacky Physics: Why Do Particles Have Flavors? Retrieved November 17, 2015 from http://
www.livescience.com/18141-wacky-physics-particle-flavors.html
Images:
Thomson atomic model: structure [art]. (2012). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/
science/Thomson-atomic-model/images-videos/Thomson-atomic-model-William-Thomson-envisioned-the-atom-as-a/18135
Rutherford atomic model [art]. (2012). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved Oct. 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/science/
Rutherford-atomic-model/images-videos/Diagram-of-the-Rutherford-atomic-model/18079
Bohr atomic model: Bohr atom with first Balmer transition [art]. (2012). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved Nov. 7, 2015 from http://
www.britannica.com/biography/Niels-Bohr/images-videos/In-the-Bohr-model-of-the-atom-electrons-travel-in/17833
VCEasy. (2014). Historical development of the model of atomic theory with contributions from Dalton to Chadwick [infographic]. Retrieved
November 10, 2015 from https://vceasy.wordpress.com/2014/02/22/unit-1-1-2a-historical-development-of-the-model-of-atomic-theory-from-
dalton-to-chadwick/
Rutherford’s Model: http://www.finetuneduniverse.com/atomsandelements.html Retrieved: August 25, 2016
Bohr’s Model: https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Bohr-atom-PAR.svg Retrieved: August 25, 2016
47
Physical)Science)) 120MINS
Corpuscles to Chemical Atomic Theory

(The Development of LESSON OUTLINE
Atomic Theory) Introduction
/&Review
Overview of the objectives and key
names or terms
10
Content&Standards&
The learners demonstrate an understanding of : Motivation Give One, Get One, Move On activity 25
about assigned text (10 minutes); Review
1. How the concept of the atom evolved from Ancient Greek to the present
Robert Boyle (15 minutes)
2. How the concept of the element evolved from Ancient Greek to the present
Instruction&/& Discussion on Antoine Lavoisier, John 60
Performance&Standards& Delivery Dalton, Chemical Atomic Theory and its
The learners shall be able to make a creative representation of the historical
evidence/implications
development of the atom or the chemical element in a timeline.
Practice Rough timeline completion 20
The learners to: Enrichment Essay writing about Boyle, Lavoisier or
1. Point out the main ideas in the discovery of the structure of the atom and its Dalton
subatomic particles (S11/12PS-IIIb-8)
Evaluation Additional Exercises, Written Outputs - 5
2. Cite the contribution of John Dalton toward the understanding of the
short response
concept of the chemical elements (S11/12PS-IIIc-13)
3. Explain how Dalton’s theory contributed to the discovery of other elements Materials Projector, computer, Index cards or
(S11/12PS-IIIc-14) sticky notes for motivation, Paper
timeline and cut-outs with names / key
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes& concepts
At the end of the lesson, the learners shall be able to:
Resources&
1. Discuss key developments in the concept of the atom and element from (1) Coyne, Glynis L. (2012). Lead to Gold, Sorcery to Science:
Robert Boyle to John Dalton. Alchemy and the Foundations of Modern Chemistry. University
2. Discuss the aspects of the Chemical Atomic Theory, and relate its evidence of North Carolina PIT Journal, 4. Retrieved October 10, 2015
(3 Fundamental Laws) to these aspects. from http://pitjournal.unc.edu/article/lead-gold-sorcery-science-
3. Gain an appreciation of the scientists involved in the development of the
science of Chemistry.
48

Overview of the objectives and key names or terms prominently on one side of the classroom
discussion.
1. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim,
subatomic particles
b. I can cite the contribution of John Dalton toward the understanding of the concept of the
chemical elements
c. I can explain how Dalton’s theory contributed to the discovery of other elements
2. Introduce the list of some important terms and names that learners will encounter:
a. Robert Boyle f. Chemical Atomic Theory
b. corpuscle g. 3 Fundamental Laws
c. Antoine Lavoisier h. Joseph Gay-Lussac
d. chemical element i. Amedeo Avogadro
e. John Dalton j. Dmitri Mendeleev
INTRODUCTION (10 MINS)
Give One, Get One, Move On activity about assigned text
3. Use the suggested Give One, Get One, Move On protocol to refresh learnings from the text 3. The learnings to be written can be
from the previous lesson (the adapted version of Glynis Coyne’s Lead to Gold, Sorcery to Science). answers to the text’s guide questions.
Example Protocol for Go-Go-Mo (There are other variations. Choose one that suits your class.)
• Walk around the room and find a partner.
49
• Give one idea to your partner.
• Get one idea from the partner and write it down.
• Move one to another partner!
• 5 minutes … move fast!
REVIEW (15 MINS)
Robert Boyle
Teacher&Tips:&
4. Focus on the example of the scientist Robert Boyle from the text. Ask learners to state the
text’s idea on Boyle that while he was a practitioner of alchemy, he was also critical about some of 4. Focus on Boyle’s contribution to the
its ideas. Expound on the highlights of Robert Boyle’s ideas: scientific method. While explaining the
corpuscular theory, emphasize that Boyle
• Corpuscles were “certain primitive and simple, or perfectly unmingled bodies” that were
championed the importance of observation
indivisible and whole. This went against the Aristotelian thinking that objects are made of and experimentation in science. This was
infinitely divisible elements. It was more like the idea of Democritus and Leucippus. part of his “mechanical philosophy.”
• He recognized elements as the simplest substances that constitute mixtures, and that
You may add that Boyle also used his
elements are those that cannot be decomposed into other substances via chemical experimental mindset to make observations
reactions. on air using a pump. He recorded his data
that enabled him to determine a
He emphasized the need to observe and test the presence of corpuscles in alchemical
quantitative relationship between the
experiments. volume of air and its pressure. We know this
today to be Boyle’s Law (higher pressure on
a gas means a smaller volume, and vice
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY (65 MINS) versa).
Discussion on Antoine Lavoisier, John Dalton, Chemical Atomic Theory and its evidence/
implications
5. Mention that Boyle’s empirical mindset slowly gained ground. The practice of performing
experiments and attempting to give possible explanations to their results and observations
became more widespread. Around 1789, a French man named Antoine Lavoisier used closed
vessels and precise weight measurements in many experiments to achieve the following:
50
• He disproved the principle of phlogiston, where heated metals were thought to lose a Teacher&Tips:&
substance of negative weight. Metals, which gain weight when heated in open air, actually
react with oxygen air, causing it to form a calx (metal oxide). 5. You may share some details of Lavoisier’s
calx experiments:
• He showed that air is not an element because it could be separated into several • When he heated metal to form a
components. By looking at the air from reacting metals and calces, he found different “types” calx, the weight of the solid went up, but
of air, one of which caused burning to happen. Lavoisier called it oxygen. the volume of air inside the vessel went
down. Part of the air became part of the
• He showed that water is not an element, because it was made of two substances. Oxygen solid!
was found to produce water when burned in the presence of “flammable air” (a part of air • When he burned the calx to
that would be later called hydrogen). produce the metal, the weight of the solid
went down, but the volume of air inside the
vessel increased. The air from this reaction
Emphasize that Lavoisier was able to refute Aristotle’s thinking of a universe composed of three or allowed respiration and burning that
released what we know as oxygen!
four elements. He had proof of Boyle’s concept of a simple substance, now known as the chemical
element. A chemical element is a substance that cannot be broken down into simpler components.
He defined a compound as a substance composed of these elements. He came up with an initial list
of 33 elements, and created a systematic way of naming elements and the compounds they created.
He also wrote the first Chemistry textbook. For this and many other contributions, he became known
as the Father of Chemistry.
6. Ask the class: Which aspects of John

6. Explain that this concept of the element allowed for another great chemist, John Dalton Dalton’s theory are not always true?
(1766-1844), to further develop the concept of the atom. His Chemical Atomic Theory merged the Answer: The atoms of an element are
concepts of the atom and element, and formally established the two in the practice of chemistry. identical in their masses. The knowledge we
have of isotopes shows that not all atoms of
• Gases, and all chemically inseparable elements, are made of atoms. a certain element have the same mass.
• The atoms of an element are identical in their masses.
• Atoms of different elements have different masses.
• Atoms combine in small, whole number ratios.
7. Explain further that Dalton proposed his atomic theory as the best explanation to three important 7. Relate this to the discussion of the Big
Bang Theory as the model that best fit the
observations made at the time. These three observations were replicable results of experiments evidence that was present at the time.
done by different scientists. Since we have enough evidence to establish these observations as
consistently occurring under certain conditions of nature, they are now known as laws, namely, the 3 There should be prior knowledge of these
Fundamental Laws: three laws from Grades 8-10. Ask learners
to articulate the laws in their own words.
51
• Antoine Lavoisier’s Law of Conservation of Mass
• Joseph Proust’s Law of Definite Proportions
• John Dalton’s Law of Multiple Proportions
Ask learners to relate the aspects of the Chemical Atomic Theory to these three fundamental laws. –
which law contributes to which aspect of the theory, and how?
 
8. Highlight the developments in the way we think about both atoms and elements as a result of
Dalton’s Chemical Atomic Theory:
• that elements were made of the same atoms and had properties unique to the element,
while chemical compounds were made of different combined or compounded atoms, and
exhibited different sets of properties.
• that one could compute the weights of elements (and their atoms) by looking at comparable
amounts of the compounds they formed.
• that one could compute atomic weights compared to a reference. Dalton set the atomic
weight of hydrogen to 1 as this reference. For this reason, the unit for atomic weight was called
the dalton for some time (it is now called the AMU or atomic mass unit).
However, given the technology at the time, the number of atoms in different compounds was not
known. For example, water was known to be formed from hydrogen and oxygen, but not in the ratio
2:1, so many calculations of atomic weight were inaccurate.
Teacher&Tips:&
9. Cite other scientists who made headway in the concept of the element thanks to Dalton’s theory.
• Joseph Gay-Lussac determined that oxygen gas was made of 2 atoms of oxygen and took 9. Mention that Gay-Lussac’s observation
the form of a molecule instead of an atom. This offered the possibility that an element wasn’t was experimentally supported by
necessarily made up of one atom, thus distinguishing the atom from the molecule. Avogadro’s ideas and method of weighing,
but that the idea that some elements were
• Amedeo Avogadro (the man who conceptualized the mole) determined that equivalent found naturally as atoms and others as
volumes of two gases under similar conditions contained equal numbers of particles, and that molecules wasn’t given much thought until
differences in their masses was a result of a difference in their molecular mass. Thus, he figured 1860.
out a reliable way of weighing atoms and molecules. This was something Dalton lacked in his
theory.
52
Teacher&Tips:&
11. Outputs will vary from class

to class. Keep in mind that the
timeline is very rough, and not
necessarily historically time-
scaled. Correct misconceptions
or errors in the sequence of
events or association of
concepts.
• Later on, Dmitri Mendeleev published a periodic table of elements that ordered elements
according to their atomic weights. He noted patterns in their properties that enabled him to
predict the discovery of other elements. His table became the basis of the modern Periodic
Table.
• Many other scientists in the 19th century discovered more elements, thanks to Dalton’s
theory, Mendeleev’s table, and the advent of improved analytical and decomposition
techniques. From Lavoisier’s 33 elements, the century ended with 82.
53
10. Show the following video by CrashCourse Chemistry to review most of the lesson: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QiiyvzZBKT8. You
can also prepare a PowerPoint presentation as a summary.
PRACTICE (20 MINS)
Rough timeline completion
11. Place/draw a blank timeline on the board. Have learners come up to the board and attach metacards with concepts or names of people or
groups. They should add dates and time periods. Dates need not be exact points on the line. Learners can modify the timeline by adding
brackets (e.g. for alchemy spanning several hundred years). They can link metacards, use arrows or lines to denote periods, etc. They should
accomplish the timeline within 20 minutes, the more detailed the better. Refer to the image below for an incomplete sample.
Figure 1. Sample timeline output containing metacards and notes.
List of metacarpus amy include, but not limited to:
ENRICHMENT
Essay writing about Boyle, Lavoisier or Dalton (Outside of class)
Democritus Antoine Lavoisier Egyptians Mesopotamians
Leucippus Aristotle atomism John Dalton
corpuscles Chemical Atomic Theory alchemy Robert Boyle

54
12. Ask learners to choose from one of the three significant names in the discussion: Boyle,
Lavoisier, or Dalton. Each learner must write five to seven paragraphs on the life of their chosen Teacher&Tips:&
scientist, highlighting three to five significant contributions to Science as a whole (not necessarily
Chemistry). 12. Outputs will vary from class to class.
Keep in mind that the timeline is very
rough, and not necessarily historically time-
scaled. Correct misconceptions or errors in
EVALUATION (5 MINS) the sequence of events or association of
concepts.
Additional Exercises, Written Outputs - short response
A. Additional Exercises (possible questions for Written Evaluation):

1. Which of the following is NOT part of Dalton’s Chemical Atomic Theory?
a. All atoms of the same element can have different masses or isotopes.
b. Atoms combine only in whole number ratios.
c. All elements are made of atoms. A. Answer Key:
d. None of the above 1. a. All atoms of the same element can
have different masses or isotopes.
2. Match the contribution in Column A to the person in Column B by writing the letter beside the
number:
Column A Column B
1) Definition of chemical element A) Dmitri Mendeleev 2. 
1) E
2) Concept of corpuscles B) Joseph Proust
2) D
3) Law of Multiple Proportions C) John Dalton 3) C
4) F
4) Some elements are found as molecules D) Robert Boyle
5) B
5) Law of Definite Proportions E) Antoine Lavoisier
F) Joseph Gay-Lussac
55
B. Written output questions (longer Essay-type or synthesis questions for Written Evaluation)
1. State and define the 3 Fundamental Laws in one to two sentences each, or using drawings/
illustrations. Teacher&Tips:&
B.
1. Answers may vary, but should be similar
to the following:
Conservation of Mass: Substances that react

in a closed system don’t gain or lose mass
Definite Proportions: Elements or atoms in
the same proportion to form a certain
compound
Multiple Proportions: If elements form more
than one compound, the ratio of the
amounts needed between the two types of
compounds are whole numbers.
56
Coyne, Glynis L. (2012). Lead to Gold, Sorcery to Science: Alchemy and the Foundations of Modern Chemistry. University of North Carolina PIT
Journal, 4. Retrieved October 10, 2015 from http://pitjournal.unc.edu/article/lead-gold-sorcery-science-alchemy-and-foundations-modern-
chemistry
Forrester, R. (2002). The History of Chemistry. Retrieved October 15, 2015 from http://homepages.paradise.net.nz/rochelle.f/The-History-of-
Chemistry.html
Rodriguez, M. (2015). The Periodic Table: Classification as a Means of Understanding. [Powerpoint slides].
Robert Boyle. (2015). Retrieved October 10, 2015 from http://www.chemheritage.org/discover/online-resources/chemistry-in-history/themes/

early-chemistry-and-gases/boyle.aspx
Antoine-Laurent Lavoisier: The Chemical Revolution. (1999 June 8). Booklet dedicated at American Chemical Society International Historic
Chemical Landmarks in Académie des Sciences de l’Institut de France, Paris, France. Retrieved October 7, 2015 from http://www.acs.org/
content/dam/acsorg/education/whatischemistry/landmarks/lavoisier/antoine-laurent-lavoisier-commemorative-booklet.pdf
Atomic Structure from Democritus to Dalton. (n.d.). Retrieved October 7, 2015 from http://www.chemteam.info/AtomicStructure/Democritus-to-
Dalton.html
John Dalton (1766-1844): The Father of the Chemical Atomic Theory. (n.d.) Retrieved October 10, 2015 from http://www.chemteam.info/
AtomicStructure/Dalton.html
Video:
The Creation of Chemistry - The Fundamental Laws: Crash Course Chemistry #3 [CrashCourse]. (2014, March 3). The Beginning of Everything –
The Big Bang [Youtube video]. Retrieved September 16, 2015 from www.youtube.com/watch?v=wNDGgL73ihY
57
Henry Moseley, the Atomic Number, and

Synthesis of Elements LESSON OUTLINE
Content&Standards& Introduction Overview of the objectives and key 10
The learners demonstrate an understanding of : /&Review names or terms
1. How the concept of the atom evolved from Ancient Greek to the present Motivation Making Your Own Periodic Table; review 10
2. How the concept of the element evolved from Ancient Greek to the about Dmitri Mendeleev
present.
Instruction&/& Henry Moseley and the atomic number; 50
Performance&Standards& Delivery synthesis of new elements
The learners can make a creative representation of the historical development
Practice Writing nuclear reactions involved in the 40
of the atom or the chemical element in a timeline.
synthesis of new elements
The learners to: Enrichment Reading of a related text: (1) Making
1. Cite the contributions of J.J. Thomson, Ernest Rutherford, Henry Moseley, New Elements (2) Discovery of the new
and Niels Bohr to the understanding of the structure of the atom (S11/12PS- chemical elements with numbers 113,
IIIb-9) 115, 117 and 118
2. Explain how the concept of atomic number led to the synthesis of new Evaluation Short Essay, Multiple Choice 10
elements in the laboratory (S11/12PS-IIIb-11)
3. Write the nuclear reactions involved in the synthesis of new elements
(S11/12PS-IIIb-12) Materials Projector, computer, PowerPoint
presentation, Paper timeline, Cut-outs
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes& with names / key concepts
At the end of the lesson, the learners will be able to:
Resources&
1. Explain how Moseley discovered the correlation between the atomic
(1) Coyne, Glynis L. (2012). Lead to Gold, Sorcery to Science:
number of an element and the wavelengths of x-rays emitted by the element Alchemy and the Foundations of Modern Chemistry. University
2. Discuss how new elements are synthesized of North Carolina PIT Journal, 4. Retrieved October 10, 2015
from http://pitjournal.unc.edu/article/lead-gold-sorcery-science-
58
discussion.
subatomic particles 2. This particular lesson is very heavy on
names and their discoveries. When
b. I can cite the contribution of John Dalton toward the understanding of the concept of the presenting the list, do so in a chart where
chemical elements discoveries are laid on one side and names
are on another. Ask students to match the
c. I can explain how Dalton’s theory contributed to the discovery of other elements
discoveries to the names as the lesson
moves along.
2. Introduce the list of some important terms and names that learners will encounter:
a. Robert Boyle f. Chemical Atomic Theory
b. corpuscle g. 3 Fundamental Laws
c. Antoine Lavoisier h. Joseph Gay-Lussac
d. chemical element i. Amedeo Avogadro
e. John Dalton j. Dmitri Mendeleev
Making Your Own Periodic Table
3. The answer is PERIODIC PROPERTY. You

3. Make your own periodic table using the hypothetical elements that are given in the clues.
may do similar motivations as a review for
Explain the word/s that will be formed if you arrange the symbols of the elements correctly. previous lessons.
a) P and Pr both have one electron each. Pr has a bigger atomic size.
b) Od, Ri, and E are in the same series as P, C, and I. In terms of atomic size, P is the
biggest while C is the smallest. E is a metal while I is a non-metal. Od is smaller than Ri in
atomic size.
c) O has a bigger atomic size than E in the same group. Y is also a bigger atom than C in
the same group. R is more nonmetallic than Pe but more metallic than Ti.
59
REVIEW (10 MINS)
Teacher&Tips:&
4. Recall and expound on how Dmitri Mendeleev created a classification of elements based on
4. Relate periodic property to Dmitri
their atomic weight. He found that organizing the elements at the time by their calculated weight
Mendeleev’s work. This is a take-off to the
demonstrated a periodic pattern of both physical and chemical properties, such as luster, physical discussion about Henry Moseley.
state, reactivity to water, and others.
5. Introduce Henry Moseley who was a researcher at Rutherford’s laboratory. In 1913 Moseley
used Rutherford’s work to advance the understanding of the elements and solve the problem with
Mendeleev’s periodic table.
Explain that organizing the elements by their weight did not always give a periodic alignment of
their chemical properties. Moseley noticed that shooting electrons at elements caused them to
release x-rays at unique frequencies. He also noticed that the frequency increased by a certain
amount when the “positive charge” of the chosen element was higher. By arranging the elements
according to the square root of the frequency they emitted, he was able to draw out an
arrangement of elements that more correctly predicted periodic trends.
Mention the experimental evidence he gave to an existing hypothesis: that the elements’ atomic
number, or place in the periodic table, was uniquely tied to their “positive charge”, or the number
of protons they had. This discovery allowed for a better arrangement of the periodic table, and
predicted elements that were not yet discovered. His method of identifying elements by shooting
electrons and looking at x-rays became a very useful tool in characterizing elements, and is now
called x-ray spectroscopy.
60
6. Synthesis of Elements
The invention of the device called cyclotron paved the way for transmuting one element into another artificially. The high-energy particles that
are produced from the cyclotron upon hitting heavy target nuclei produce heavier nuclei.
The bombarding of Mo with deuteron formed technicium which is the first artificially made element. Its name is derived from the Greek word
technetos which means artificial.
96
42Mo + 21H —> 97
43Tc + 10n
The Transuranic Elements

Transuranic elements are synthetic elements with atomic numbers higher than that of Uranium
(Z = 92).
Neptunium (Z = 93) – synthesized by E.M. MacMillan in 1940
238 U + 10n —> 23993Np + 0-1ß

92
Plutonium (Z = 94)
238 U
92 + 21H —> 23893Np + 210n
238 Np —> 23894Np+ 0-1ß

93
The Superheavy Elements

Superheavy elements are elements with atomic numbers beyond 103. These are produced by bombarding heavy nuclear targets with
accelerated heavy projectiles.
61
Bohrium (Z = 107) – projectile used was Cr
209 Bi
83 + 5424Cr —> 261107Bh + 210n
Teacher&Tips:&
PRACTICE (40 MINS)
7. Answer Key
Write the nuclear reactions involved in the synthesis of each of the following new elements.
a) 23994Pu + 42He —> 24296Cm + 10n

a) Curium (Z = 96) was formed by reacting Pu – 239 with alpha particles 42He. It has a half-life of
Cm is named after Marie and Pierre Curie
162 days.
who had done extensive research on natural
radioactivity.
b) Mendelevium (Z = 101) was formed by reacting En – 253 with alpha particles.
b) 25399 En + 42He —> 256101Mv + 10n
Mv is named after Dmitri Mendeleev.

c) Meitnerium (Z = 109) was formed by cold fusion which involves the combination of Bi and Fe
nuclides at ordinary temperature. c) 20983Bi + 5826Fe —> 266109Mt + 10n
8. If time is not enough, this can be given as

ENRICHMENT an assignment. Ask your students to write a
reaction paper about the topics.
Read the following related texts.
a) Making New Elements http://www.popsci.com/science/article/2013-04/making-new-elements

Retrieved: May 20, 2016
b) Discovery of the new chemical elements with numbers 113, 115, 117 and 118 http://www.jinr.ru/
posts/discovery- of-the-new-chemical-elements-with-numbers-113-115-117-and-118-2/
Retrieved: May 20, 2016
62
A. Short Essay (maximum of 3 sentences)
1) Dmitri Mendeleev is often regarded as the Father of the Periodic Table. Would you say that
Henry Moseley deserves the recognition more than him?
2) Explain why the atomic number is called the “fingerprint” of elements.
3) How would you relate alchemy to synthesis of new elements?
B. Choose the letter of the correct answer, and then write the nuclear reaction. Identify the element.
Teacher&Tips:&
An isotope of element 102, with a mass number of 253 was produced by bombarding
24096Cm with a projectile, which was absorbed by the target nucleus. This projectile should Answer Key
be ___
B. b
a) 5
2He b) 136C c) 126C d) 168O
240 Cm+ 136C —> 253102 No
96
Nobelium
63
Giunta, C. (2010). Atoms are Divisible: The Pieces Have Pieces. In C. Giunta (Ed.), Atoms in Chemistry: From Dalton's Predecessors to Complex
Atoms and Beyond (pp. 65-81), ACS Symposium Series 1044. American Chemical Society: Washington, DC.
Bohr atomic model. (2015). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/science/Bohr-
atomic-model
Chadwick discovers the neutron. (1998). Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/aso/databank/entries/dp32ne.html
Chronology of Discoveries in Atomic Structure. (n.d.) Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.chemteam.info/AtomicStructure/Hist-
AtomicStructure.pdf
Henry Moseley. (2014, December 29). Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.famousscientists.org/henry-moseley/
Rutherford atomic model. (2015). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/science/
Rutherford-atomic-model
Thomson atomic model. (2015). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/science/
Thomson-atomic-model
Making new elements. (2013). Retrieved May 20, 2016 from http://www.popsci.com/science/article/2013-04/making-new-elements
Gopalan, R. (1999). Elements of nuclear chemistry. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House PVT LTD.
Discovery of the new chemical elements with numbers 113, 115, 117 and 118. (2016). Retrieved May 20, 2016 from http://www.jinr.ru/posts/
discovery- of-the-new-chemical-elements-with-numbers-113-115-117-and-118-2/
64
Images:
Thomson atomic model: structure [art]. (2012). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved October 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/
science/Thomson-atomic-model/images-videos/Thomson-atomic-model-William-Thomson-envisioned-the-atom-as-a/18135
Rutherford atomic model [art]. (2012). In Encyclopædia Britannica Online. Retrieved Oct. 27, 2015 from http://www.britannica.com/science/
Rutherford-atomic-model/images-videos/Diagram-of-the-Rutherford-atomic-model/18079
65
Polarity of Molecules
Content&Standards&
The learners demonstrate an understanding of how the uses of different LESSON OUTLINE
materials are related to their properties and structures.
Introduction Presentation of objectives and terms 5
Performance&Standards& /&Review
The learners shall be able to explain how the uses of different materials are
Motivation Polarity Experiment 10
related to their properties and structures.
The learners to: Instruction&/& Class discussion 50
1. Determine if a molecule is polar or non-polar given its structure   Delivery
(S11/12PS-IIIc-15) Practice Electro negativity and molecular 20
2. Relate the polarity of a molecule to its properties (S11/12PS-IIIc-16) geometry
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes& Enrichment Applications of polarity, VSEPR model- 10

At the end of the lesson, the learners shall be able to: making
1. Define electronegativity
Evaluation Written exam 25
2. Find the electronegativity of elements in the periodic table
Materials • Projector, computer
3. Explain the VSEPR theory
• Periodic table, balloons
4. Draw the geometry of molecules using the VSEPR theory
• Other experiment materials (refer to
5. Distinguish between polar and non-polar molecules
list below)
6. Relate the properties of molecules to its polarityProvide an overview of the
• Recyclable materials for model-
proof for the Big Bang model
making (learner-brought)
Resources&
INTRODUCTION (5 MINS) (1) Whitten, K.W., Davis, R.E., Peck, M.L., & Stanley, G.G., (2005).
General Chemistry 7th ed. Singapore: Thomson/Brooks/Cole.;
Presentation of objectives and terms
Communicate learning objectives and important terms.
66
1. Introduce the learning objectives below using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim, Own Teacher&Tips:&
Words, Read-aloud):
a. I can define what electronegativity is and find its values in the periodic table Display the objectives and terms
prominently on one side of the classroom so
b. I can explain the VSEPR theory
that the learners can refer to them and
c. I can draw the geometry of molecules using the VSEPR theory review as more terms are introduced.
d. I can distinguish between polar and non-polar molecules
e. I can relate the properties of molecules to its polarity
2. Introduce the list of important terms that learners will encounter:

a. Electronegativity d. Covalent bond
b. Valence electron e. Miscible
c. Dipole f. Immiscible
Polarity Experiment This experiment can be done either as a

Materials group activity or as a class demonstration.
For class demonstration, larger amounts can
• Water be used for the learners to see the results
• Vinegar better.
• Vegetable oil Adding color to the solutions will make it

• Gasoline easier to see the different results. Be sure to
use contrasting colors.
• Food coloring (optional for coloring water and vinegar)
• Candle dye (optional for coloring the vegetable oil)
• Test tubes or graduated cylinder
• Stirring rod
Procedure
Mix the following samples well with a spoon and observe their reactions. Stir the mixture.
Remember to wash and dry the stirring rod after each use.
67
a. Water + vinegar
b. Water + oil
c. Water + gasoline
d. Oil + vinegar
e. Oil + gasoline
Disposal
Samples with oil and gasoline should first be mixed with dishwashing liquid before disposing down
the sink.
Have the learners hypothesize why certain combinations mix better than others. Ask them to group
the samples together according to how well they mix.
Learners should be able to predict the results of the experiment as they mix oil and water. They
should recall simple chores they do at home such as washing out oil from pans.
Suggest that water and vinegar can be grouped together while oil and gasoline belong to another
group. These substances can be classified as polar and non-polar substances. The difference in
polarity explains why certain combinations mix and not others.
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY / PRACTICE (70 MINS)
Class discussion
Teacher&Tips:&
Introduce the two factors that determine the polarity of molecules. These are:
1. Review the difference between ionic and
1) The polarity of the bonds between atoms which can be studied based on electronegativity, covalent compounds. You may also
and approach the subject based on the
difference in electronegativity (EN).
2) The geometrical shape of the molecule which can be predicted via the valence shell electron
pair repulsion (VSEPR) theory.
68
Bond Polarity (20 minutes) Teacher&Tips:&
2. Have a large periodic table at hand.
Review Grade 9 chemistry discussions on properties of elements found in the periodic table such as Learners should also have their own
boiling points, melting points, oxidation number, etc. Point out that one of the properties found in individual periodic tables.
the periodic table is the electronegativity of elements.
Electronegativity (EN) - Measure of the relative tendency of an atom to attract electrons to itself
when chemically combined with another atom. The higher the value of electronegativity, the more
it tends to attract electrons toward itself.
Introduce polar covalent and non-polar covalent bonds.
3. Have the learners familiarize themselves

Polar covalent bonds occur when electron pairs are unequally shared. The difference in with the periodic table. Let them find the
electronegativity between atoms is significant. Examples of compounds having polar covalent EN value of several elements. Have them
determine the most electronegative
bonds are:
element and the least electronegative
element.
HCl EN of H = 2.1 EN of Cl = 3.0 ΔEN = 0.9

HF EN of H = 2.1 EN of F = 4.0 ΔEN = 1.9
The separation of charges makes the bond polar. It creates an electric dipole. Dipole refers to “two 4. Draw the electron cloud for each sample
poles,” meaning there is a positive and a negative pole within a molecule. Elements with the higher for the sake of visual learners.
EN value become the partial negative pole while elements with the lower EN value become the
partial positive pole. This makes the molecule a polar molecule
Non-polar covalent bonds occur when electron pairs are shared equally or the difference in
electronegativity between atoms is less than 0.5. Examples of substances having non-polar covalent
bonds are:
H2 EN of H = 2.1 ΔEN = 0.0 NON-POLAR MOLECULE; not a dipole
Cl2 EN of Cl = 3.0 ΔEN = 0.0 NON-POLAR MOLECULE; not a dipole
F2 EN of F = 4.0 ΔEN = 0.0 NON-POLAR MOLECULE; not a dipole
HI EN of H = 2.1 EN of I = 2.5 ΔEN = 0.4 POLAR MOLECULE; a dipole
69
Provide several examples and have the learners determine if the bond between elements are polar Teacher&Tips:&
covalent or non-polar covalent.
Seatwork
CH4 CF4 O2 HBr
Answer key
CH4
EN of H = 2.1 EN of C = 2.5 ΔEN = 0.4
Non polar covalent bond
CF4
EN of C = 2.5 EN of F = 4.0 ΔEN = 1.5
Polar covalent bond
O2
EN of O = 3.4 ΔEN = 0.0
Non polar covalent bond
HBr
EN of H= 2.1 EN of Br = 2.8 ΔEN = 0.7
Polar covalent bond
Proceed to discuss molecular geometry, another important which determines if a molecule is polar or
not.
Molecular Geometry (30 minutes)

5. You may take up Molecular Geometry the
following day.
The valence shell electron pair repulsion theory or VSEPR theory helps predict the spatial
70
arrangement of atoms in a polyatomic molecule. The shapes are designed to minimize the
repulsion within a molecule.
Show a five-minute video showing the five different geometric shapes under the VSEPR theory,
namely, linear, trigonal planar, tetrahedral, trigonal bipyramidal, and octahedral. The video also
explains the basic principle behind the VSEPR theory.
OldSite Vanden Bout. (2011). VSEPR Theory: Introduction. Retrieved from https://www.youtube.com/
watch?v=keHS-CASZfc
Present the images below summarizing the different shapes under the VSEPR theory.
Teacher&Tips:&
6. Using balloons as models to present a

three-dimensional view of the different
VSEPR shapes will help to improve
discussions than by using two-dimensional
drawings.
Linear Bent
Trigonal Planar Tetrahedral
71
Trigonal bipyramidal Octahedral
Figure 1. Linear, Retrieved May 10, 2016 from  

http://chemlab.truman.edu/CHEM131Labs/MolecularModeling1.asp
Figure 2. Bent, Retrieved May 10, 2016 from  
https://quizlet.com/4023155/chemistry-molecular-bonding-structure-chs-8-9-flash-cards/
Figure 3. Trigonal planar, Retrieved May 10, 2016 from 
Figure 4. Tetrahedral, Retrieved May 10, 2016 from 
Figure 5. Trigonal bipyramidal, Retrieved May 10, 2016 from  
https://www.studyblue.com/notes/note/n/molecular-geometry-/deck/13026512
Figure 6. Octahedral, Retrieved May 10, 2016 from Trigonal planar and Octahedral 
Focus on the basic shapes such as linear, bent, tetrahedral, trigonal pyramidal, trigonal planar, and octahedral.
Emphasize that symmetry plays an important role in determining the polarity of a molecule.
Give the following guidelines to determine the VSEPR shape of a molecule:

1. Determine the central atom of a molecule. The central atom is the least electronegative element.
2. Count how many valence electrons the central atom has.
72
3. Count how many valence electrons the side atoms have.
4. Create the appropriate Lewis structure of the molecule.
5. Using the Lewis structure as a guide, determine the appropriate VSEPR shape for the molecule.
6. Note how many electrons are shared and unshared. This will help determine the appropriate VSEPR shape.
Practice with learners on how to determine and draw different molecular shapes using the examples below. Emphasize that lone pairs has a big
factor in making a molecule polar.
Polar molecule:
H2O Bent - polar due to two lone pairs
NH3 Trigonal pyramidal - polar due to one lone pair
NO Linear - polar due to unequal sharing of electrons
Due to the two lone pairs, the water molecule has a bent shape.
Figure 7. Lewis Structures and the Shapes of Molecules, Retrieved February 18, 2016 from  
https://www.angelo.edu/faculty/kboudrea/general/shapes/00_lewis.htm#PolarNon-polar
73
Note that dots refer to unshared electrons in the Lewis structure above and a dash refers to bonding between two electrons.
Point out the effects of lone pairs in the shape and polarity of a molecule.
δ+ δ−
δ + refers to partial positive pole
refers to partial negative pole
δ−
Non-polar molecule
CO2 Linear
CH4 Tetrahedral
CCl4 Tetrahedral
Emphasize the difference between bond polarity and molecular polarity. The presence of polar bonds does not automatically make a molecule
polar. The geometry of the molecule also plays an important role. This can be seen in CO2 wherein the electronegativity difference of C and O
is 1.0 which makes the bond between them polar. However carbon is placed in the middle of two oxygen atoms making the molecular structure
linear. This equal distribution of polar bonds make the molecule non-polar.
Figure 8. Retrieved February 18, 2016, from https://www.angelo.edu/faculty/kboudrea/general/shapes/00_lewis.htm#PolarNon-polar

74
Summarize the lesson with emphasis to the fact that molecules are polar or non-polar based on the type of covalent bond and its molecular
geometry.
Mention that one of the most practical manifestations of polarity is solubility and miscibility. Solubility refers to the ability of a solute to dissolve
in a certain amount of solvent. Miscibility is the ability of two liquids to mix in all proportions.
Solubility, Miscibility, and Polarity
Give the general rule that “like dissolves like” or “like mixes with like.” This refers to substances being able to mix due to their same polarity.
In the experiment, water and vinegar mixed because they are both polar substances while gasoline and oil are non-polar substances. Oil and
water, oil and vinegar, gasoline and water, and vinegar and gasoline do not mix because their polarities are different.
Electronegativity and molecular geometry
Determine the polarity of the following compounds based on electronegativity differences and molecular geometry.
Molecular geometry Polarity

1. HBr linear polar
2. PH3 trigonal pyramidal polar
3. SiS2 linear non-polar
4. O2 linear non-polar
5. BCl3 trigonal planar non-polar
Communicate learning objectives and important terms.
75
Applications of polarity, VSEPR model-making
Introduce the concept of polarity in biological examples. Teacher&Tips:&
Explain the importance of the polarity of molecules by citing how many biological processes rely 1. Show diagrams of a healthy red blood
on polarity. Give proteins and phospholipids as examples. Proteins are macromolecules having cell, a sickle cell, and phospholipids.
2. The teacher may also explore emulsifiers
polar and non-polar parts that are essential to life. Protein chains can be so long that they must and surfactants as an extension.
bend and form a particular shape. The shape is affected by attraction and repulsion among polar
and non-polar groups. Proteins that have an irregular shape are not able to perform biological
functions well. One particular example is a hereditary disease called sickle cell anemia wherein the
red blood cell acquires the shape of a sickle or crescent moon instead of a normal circular shape.
This irregularity in shape lessens the ability of the red blood cells to carry oxygen throughout the
body.
Phospholipids on the other hand are biological macromolecules that normally form as cell
membrane. Phospholipids have a water-loving (polar) and water-fearing (non-polar) part. This 3. If time permits, learners may also create
VSEPR models of different compounds
macromolecule orients itself in such a way that the polar part is oriented towards the watery using recyclable materials.
environment (outwards) while the non-polar orients itself away from the watery environment
(inwards). In this way, cells are able to perform their functions.
Ask the learners to come up with other applications of polarity. E.g. Water-based paint vs. Oil-based
paint, applications in cooking, milk as remedy for eating spicy food (milk has globules of fat which
bonds with the oil in spicy food), etc.
76
Determine the following:
A. Molecular geometry
B. Bond polarity between atoms
C. Polarity of the molecule
Students should have their periodic tables with them for the exam.
Bond Polarity Molecular Geometry Polarity of Molecule

a. H2O polar bent polar
b. CCl4 non-polar tetrahedral non-polar
c. BF3 non-polar trigonal planar non-polar
d. SF6 non-polar octahedral non-polar
e. SiF4 polar tetrahedral non- polar
77
Intermolecular Forces
Content&Standards&
The learners demonstrate an understanding on how the uses of different LESSON OUTLINE
materials are related to their properties and structures.
Introduction Presentation of objectives and 5
Performance&Standards& /&Review terms
The learners shall be able to explain how the intermolecular forces relate to the
properties, uses and structure of substance. Motivation Group experiments / Class 25
demonstration
The learners: Instruction&/& Class discussion 90
1. Describe the general types of intermolecular forces (S11/12PS-IIIc-d-17) Delivery&/&
2. Give the type of intermolecular forces in the properties of substances Practice
(S11/12PS-IIId-e-18) Enrichment Fact sheet 30
3. Explain the effect of intermolecular forces on the properties of substances
(S11/12PS-IIId-e-19) Evaluation Written exam 30
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes& Materials • Projector, computer

At the end of the lesson, the learners shall be able to: • Laboratory supplies (refer to
1. Describe the general types of intermolecular forces experiments/demonstration below)
2. Give the type of intermolecular forces in the properties of substances Resources&
(1) Whitten, K. W., Davis, R. E., Peck, M. L., & Stanley, G. G., (2005).
3. Explain the effect of intermolecular forces on the properties of substances
General Chemistry 7th ed. Singapore: Thomson/ Brooks/ Cole.;
(2) Atkins, P. W. Chemical Bonding. (2016). In Encyclopedia
INTRODUCTION (5 MINS) Britannica. Retrieved February 20, 2016 from http://
www.britannica.com/science/chemical-bonding/Intermolecular-
Communicate learning objectives and important terms forces
(3) Berstein, R., Carpi, A., (2015). Properties of Liquids In
Visionlearning. Retrieved February 20, 2016 from http://
1. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the suggested www.visionlearning.com/en/library/Chemistry/1//222/reading
protocols (Verbatim, Own Words, Read-aloud):
a. Describe the different types of intermolecular forces
78
b. Determine the different types of intermolecular forces in different substances and relate
them to its properties
c. Explain how the different intermolecular forces are utilized in different fields such as in
medical implants, electronic devices, etc.

a. Intermolecular forces j. Adhesion
b. Intramolecular forces k. Cohesion
c. Ion-ion interaction l. Concave meniscus
d. Van der Waals forces m. Convex meniscus
e. Dipole-dipole interaction n. Viscosity
f. Hydrogen bond o. Boiling point
g. Dispersion forces or London forces p. Melting point
h. Induced dipole q. Joule
i. Surface tension r. Mole
Group experiments / Class demonstration
Experiment/ Demonstration Teacher&Tips:&
Do Experiment 1 if you wish to conserve

Choose any of the following experiments/demonstration: methanol. Always remind the learners to be
careful when handling different chemicals.
MSDS sheets and a first aid kit should
1. Floating paper clip (10 minutes) always be at hand.
Carefully suspend a paper clip on water. This demonstration requires practice.
79
Before the activity, ask the learners to predict what will happen when the paper clip is carefully
placed on the surface of the water. Some may predict that it will float. Some will say that it will
sink given that the clip is made of metal. Once the paper clip is made to float ask the learners to
observe closely where the clip and the water meets. Point out that the interaction between the
water and the paper clip allows it to float. This interaction is called intermolecular forces.
2. Methanol and Water--Hydrogen bonding (10 minutes)
Measure out 50 mL of water and 50 mL of methanol in separate 100 mL graduated cylinders.

Have the learners check that the measurements are accurate.
Ask the learners what they think will happen when they mix the methanol with the water. Expect Teacher&Tips:&
answers such as 1) nothing will happen, it will be like normal mixing of two liquids, 2) the
mixture will get cold when mixed, 3) volume will add up. For Experiment 2, make sure to use large
containers for a better and more dramatic
effect. A large graduated cylinder is the
Mix the methanol into the water. best.
Experiment 2 can be viewed from this video

The learners will expect the cylinder to be full but the amount will be less than 100 mL, only https://www.youtube.com/watch?
about 95-97 mL. The solution will also heat up quite a bit which indicates a reaction. The v=WCd80xsukRI (Retrieved February 19,
hydrogen bond between the water and the methanol decreases the volume of the solution. 2016)
80
Surface Tension
A. Water and Sulfur (10 minutes)

Fill a 500 mL beaker to about three-quarters full with water.
Sprinkle some sulfur on top of the water. Observe.
Put a few drops of liquid detergent at the tip of a stirring rod and gently touch the surface of the
water. Observe.
When the sulfur is sprinkled on top of the water, it will stay on the surface. This is due to surface
tension. When the liquid detergent touches the water, it will break the surface tension thereby
allowing the sulfur to fall into the water.
B. Water and Paper clips (10 minutes)

Fill a jar to the brim with water without spilling.
Teacher&Tips:&
Add paper clips into the water. Count how many paper clips can be added without the water
spilling out.
Experiments 3 can be viewed from this
Create a “boat” using a bent paper clip with a small piece of paper attached to it to serve as a video https://www.youtube.com/watch?
mast. Gently suspend it on top of the liquid and watch it float. v=ODnqtf3aAvw (Retrieved February 19,
2016)
Before adding the paper clips, ask the class to guess how many paper clips the water can take to Sulfur may be replaced with pepper.
raise anticipation. The result will introduce surface tension as the learners will not expect to see
metal floating on water.
C. Invisible force (Demonstration) (10 minutes)

Place a wire mesh over the opening of a pickling jar and secure it around the edges of the jar’s
rim. You may use hot glue to stick the wire mesh in place if necessary.
Fill another glass jar with water and place a cardboard over it. Carefully invert the jar on the table
while keeping the cardboard flat and in place. Pull the cardboard quickly to release the water.
Next, pour water on the jar with the wire mesh. Place the cardboard over it and carefully invert the
jar on the table. Expect the learners to be surprised when the water does not pour out like it did
the first jar. Tilt the jar to release the water.
81
The surface tension between the water and the wire mesh holds the water in the jar.
Note that this experiment requires practice before performing it in class.
Teacher&Tips:&
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY / PRACTICE (90 MINS) For background reference:

Johannes Diderik van der Waals’
Class Discussion Biography http://www.nobelprize.org/
nobel_prizes/physics/laureates/1910/waals-
Give a demonstration/lecture/simulation bio.html (Retrieved February 20, 2016)
http://www.nndb.com/people/
Types of Intermolecular Forces (45 minutes) 509/000099212/ (Retrieved February 20,
2016)
Gather observations from the experiments and demonstrations. Relate how these phenomena are http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/
theorized to be due to intermolecular forces of attraction. physics/laureates/1910/waals-facts.html
(February 20, 2016)
Lecture proper http://www.britannica.com/science/van-der-

Waals-forces (February 20, 2016)
First establish the distinction between intramolecular forces and intermolecular forces of attraction. http://www.thefamouspeople.com/profiles/
Ask the learners to derive the meaning of the words focusing on the prefix intra and inter. johannes-van-der-waals-3906.php (April 20,
2016)
Intramolecular forces are many times stronger than intermolecular forces of attraction. Intramolecular Facts on Johannes Diderik van der Waals
http://www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/
forces are forces that hold molecules together. They are forces within a molecule. Intermolecular
physics/laureates/1910/waals-facts.html
forces are forces that form between molecules, atoms, or ions. (Retrieved February 20, 2016)
Note that Johannes van der Waals did not

develop the theory on the different types of
H2O(g) → 2H2(g) + O2(g) absorbs 927 kJ/ mol (H-O bond breaking) intermolecular forces. He was only the first
one who postulated them during the
development of his theory on the behavior
H2O(l) → H2O(g) absorbs 40.7 kJ/ mol of real gases in 1873.
The comparison above shows the relative strengths of intermolecular forces and intramolecular
82
forces in terms of energy involved. Intermolecular forces are responsible for the condensed phases
of substances (liquid and solid form). Solids and liquids will not exist without them.
Teacher&Tips:&
Introduce that intermolecular forces called Van der Waals forces, named after Johannes Diderik van
Van der Waals forces were named after him
der Waals who first proposed these forces.
to pay tribute to his great contribution on
the study of liquids and gases.
Introduce the four main types of intermolecular forces: In 1930, Fritz London, a German-born
physicist (March 7, 1900 - March 30,1954)
1. Ion-ion interaction traced intermolecular forces to electron
2. Dipole-dipole interaction motion within molecules. He needed
quantum mechanics in order to correctly
3. Hydrogen bonding describe the forces.
4. Dispersion forces also known as London forces in honor of Fritz London.
http://www.britannica.com/science/van-der-
Waals-forces (Retrieved February 20, 2016)
Ion-ion interaction Remind the learners of the following:

- difference between cation and anion
Ion-ion interaction exists between oppositely charged ions. It occurs between ionic
- atomic sizes of the given elements
compounds. Most ion-ion interaction is strong and compounds which have them have high
melting and boiling points. Remind the learners that polar molecules
are also referred to as “dipoles” due to
their two poles.
Ions of like charges repel while opposite charges attract. The compound orients itself in such a
way as to minimize repulsion. The strength of ion-ion interaction is inversely proportional to the
square of distance between the ions. This is the strongest intermolecular force.
83
Teacher&Tips:&
Van der Waals forces were named after him

to pay tribute to his great contribution on
the study of liquids and gases.
In 1930, Fritz London, a German-born

physicist (March 7, 1900 - March 30,1954)
traced intermolecular forces to electron
motion within molecules. He needed
quantum mechanics in order to correctly
describe the forces.
http://www.britannica.com/science/van-der-
The table above shows that the smaller ions have stronger ion-ion interaction
Waals-forces (Retrieved February 20, 2016)
compared to larger ions.
Remind the learners of the following:
- difference between cation and anion
In presenting the different forces, it is advisable to contrast one from the other in terms of particles - atomic sizes of the given elements
involved and strength. Have a table or an outline on the board to show the forces and their
Remind the learners that polar molecules
properties throughout the discussion.
are also referred to as “dipoles” due to
their two poles.
Dipole-dipole interaction
Occurs between polar molecules. This is due to the partial positive pole and the partial
negative pole of the molecule. Average dipole-dipole interaction is relatively weak, around 4kJ/
mol. This interaction is effective over a very short range. The strength of dipole-dipole interaction
is inversely proportional to distance raised to the fourth power (d4).
84
Dipole-dipole interaction
Image from http://zube.brinkster.net/SCH3U11/

MatterBonding/Bonding/Reading/
sch3ubondingunit.html (Retrieved February 20, 2016)
Image from http://www.visionlearning.com/es/

library/Qu%C3%ADmica/1/Properties-of-Liquids/222
(Retrieved February 20, 2016)
85
Teacher&Tips:&
The figure above shows the partially charged poles of the molecules, and the attraction and
Mention that hydrogen bond is not a bond
repulsion between them. Both attraction and repulsion occur simultaneously.
as we would think of ionic and covalent
bond. It does not occur within a molecule.
Hydrogen Bond
Refer back to Experiment 1 using methanol
Hydrogen bond is a very strong dipole-dipole interaction. Hydrogen bond occurs in polar and water to this type of bond to make
molecules containing H and any one of the highly electronegative elements, in particular F, learners understand the presence of many H
atoms which are capable of bonding with
O, N. Hydrogen tends to be strongly positive due to the strong tendencies of F, O, or N to attract
the O atoms. It was H-bond that decreased
the electron towards it. The highly electronegative elements make hydrogen strongly positive. the volume of the solution. Show the
Hydrogen bonding is responsible for the unusually high boiling point and melting point of water chemical formula of water (H2O) and
as compared to compounds of similar molecular weight and geometry. Typically, H-bond is in the methanol (CH3OH)
range of 15-20 kJ/mol.
Hydrogen bonding between methanol

and water
Also relate the experiment using paper clips

and water (Experiment 2 Surface Tension) to
H-bonding.
Image from http://www.bbc.co.uk/

bitesize/higher/chemistry/energy/bsp/
revision/2/ (Retrieved February 20, 2016)
86
Show the image below comparing the boiling points of hydrogen with compounds. Ask the learners what they notice about the table and the
compounds charted in it. Ask what is being compared (e.g. boiling points of compounds from row 2, 3, 4) and the trend that they see.
Notice that the trend from row 3 to 5 is increasing but there is an unusually high value for elements in row 2 containing F, O, and N. If the trend
were uniform throughout, the values for row 2 would be lower than the values in row 3 (as is evident in CH4). Instead, there is a deviation due to
H-bonding.
Image retrieved (February 20, 2016) from http://www.bbc.co.uk/bitesize/higher/chemistry/energy/bsp/revision/4/
Use the properties of water to show the uniqueness of H-bonds.
The ability of water to form hydrogen bonds relates to its ability to be a universal solvent. Due to its polarity, it is able to dissolve (or interact)
with ionic compounds and polar molecules. Hydrogen bonding is also very important to life in general as the H-bond prevents water from
quickly evaporating into the atmosphere. In freezing temperature, the H-bond causes the water molecules to form a crystal lattice thereby
87
increasing its volume. This is why ice floats on water. This prevents the water beneath from
cooling down further as the ice sheet acts a protective layer. This allows marine creatures to Teacher&Tips:&
survive in cold weather. H-bonding in water is also important in the hydration of organic
molecules and in the formation of peptide bonds within proteins. To better grasp the idea of induced dipoles,
use the induced magnetism caused by
permanent magnets on metal as an
In the experiment where methanol (CH3OH) is mixed with water, H-bonding is responsible for the example.
decrease in volume of the solution and the production of heat.
Give various context for the word induce to
facilitate understanding.
Dispersion Forces or London Forces
Dispersion force is present in all molecules. It is the only force present in nonpolar
molecules. It is very weak and acts in very small distances. It is formed due to the attraction
between the positively charged nucleus of an atom with the negatively charged electron cloud of
a nearby atom. This interaction creates an induced dipole. The strength of dispersion forces is
inversely proportional to distance raised to the 7th power (d7). Without dispersion forces
substances would not be able to condense to liquid and solid phase.
Image from http://www.bbc.co.uk/

bitesize/higher/chemistry/energy/bsp/
revision/2/ (Retrieved February 20, 2016)
88
The image above shows a lone iodine molecule having equal electron density. When several iodine molecules are exposed to each other, an
induce dipole is created. This is shown in the uneven electron density of the iodine molecules.
As the molecular weight of molecules increases (which also corresponds to an increased number of electrons), the polarization increases due to
dispersion forces. Sometimes, dispersion forces can be stronger than dipole-dipole interaction or even H-bonding.
Ask the learners to analyze the chart below and explain what the table means. Ask what are being compared and the trend that they see.
Image Retrieved (February 20, 2016) from http://

www.bbc.co.uk/bitesize/higher/chemistry/
energy/bsp/revision/4/
The above diagram shows that the increase in boiling point in correlation with the increased molecular weight of the different compounds is
attributed to increased dispersion forces.
89
Teacher&Tips:&
Properties of Substances in Relation to Intermolecular Forces (45 minutes)

Have the class review the lesson in groups
of three before proceeding to the next
Recall the experiments and the following: (15 minutes) lesson. Make a table on the board
summarizing the four different kinds of
- intramolecular vs intermolecular forces intermolecular forces. Color code each
- Van der Waals forces force to help memory retention.
- ion-ion interaction A mind map also works as an alternative to

- dipole-dipole interaction a table.
- H- bond Recall Exercise:

- dispersion forces Use a “talking stick” to help the class
remember the lesson. This is when a stick
gets passed around from one learner to the
From the previous discussion and the experiment, certain properties relating to intermolecular next. The one who has a stick will recall a
lesson point out loud then pass the stick to
properties were discussed, namely: any classmate who has to recall another
- boiling point point. You can choose to be strict on the
rules by having the class follow an outline
- melting point during the exercise, or it can be free-
- surface tension flowing. Determine which topic the learners
remember most and least. Reinforce certain
topics as needed.
Use this as the jump off point to introduce the relationship of intermolecular forces with physical
properties. Instead of a stick, you can use a ball that
can be tossed around in the classroom. This
can be exciting for learners but you must
Create a list on the board of the different properties that you will discuss. Derive the definition of exercise some degree of control or some of
them may get rowdy.
each property by giving various phenomena. Use the experiments as examples since the learners Include parts of the experiment in the recall.
have experienced them firsthand. Learners will be familiar with the properties of boiling point and
melting point and their relationship to intermolecular forces from the previous discussion.
90
Teacher&Tips:&
Property Phenomena / Discussion
Have the class review the lesson in groups
Experiment with the jar with wire mesh of three before proceeding to the next
Surface tension and water not spilling over despite being lesson. Make a table on the board
tipped over completely. This is due to H- summarizing the four different kinds of
intermolecular forces. Color code each
A phenomenon caused by cohesive forces bonding. force to help memory retention.
(intermolecular forces) between molecules
A mind map also works as an alternative to
allowing liquids to create a thin film on its Paper clips in the water experiment.
a table.
surface. This causes liquids to acquire a
certain shape when put on a container or Recall Exercise:
Certain insects or reptiles being able to
dropped on surfaces. Use a “talking stick” to help the class
walk/ glide over water. (water striders, remember the lesson. This is when a stick
fisher spiders, basilisk lizard). gets passed around from one learner to the
In a container, the bulk of a liquid has a next. The one who has a stick will recall a
lesson point out loud then pass the stick to
balance of intermolecular forces in all
any classmate who has to recall another
direction. There is a net inward force on point. You can choose to be strict on the
the surface since there are no liquids rules by having the class follow an outline
there. This creates surface tension. during the exercise, or it can be free-
flowing. Determine which topic the learners
Stronger intermolecular bonds equates to
remember most and least. Reinforce certain
stronger surface tension. topics as needed.
Instead of a stick, you can use a ball that

can be tossed around in the classroom. This
! can be exciting for learners but you must
exercise some degree of control or some of
Basilisk lizard or the Jesus lizard being able them may get rowdy.
to walk in water by virtue of surface Include parts of the experiment in the recall.
tension
91
Teacher&Tips:&
Image Retrieved (February 20, 2016) from
http://2012books.lardbucket.org/books/ Another recall activity is to challenge the
principles-of-general-chemistry-v1.0/ learners to use the last word used by their
section_15/ classmates as the first word of their recall
statement. Large classes can do the
c9615ada612b01b0b04ca98321a14fb5.jpg
exercise by pairs.
Cohesive and adhesive forces are both due

to intermolecular force.
!
Water striders are also able to walk or
stride in the water due to surface tension. Real life example makes the lesson more
meaningful. This is particularly important for
very abstract topics such as these.
!
Fish spider
Images retrieved (February 20, 2016) from

http://voices.nationalgeographic.com/
2014/06/19/walk-water-animals-science-
weird-environment-world/
92
Liquid mercury being able to glide on a surface. Show a video of mercury on a surface but not
wetting the surface (as is expected with liquids). Warning: Mercury is toxic.
A video of mercury can be found in:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WR7SIeD-8-o
The video shows how strongly mercury holds on to its surface. It is able to change shape without
breaking. The strong intermolecular forces hold the mercury together.
Once you have shown the learners the various phenomena, bring their attention to the shape of
the water’s surface (from the experiment). Have them imagine water as tiny polar droplets beside
each other. Make them think of the reason why the water does not spill immediately and creates
an invisible elastic film on its surface.
Challenge them to relate their answers to intermolecular forces. The learners may draw the image
that they are thinking of on the board and provide their theory. Once the correct explanation has
been given, ask the learners to formally define what surface tension is.
Formation of meniscus Recall the water and methanol on the graduated cylinder and point out its meniscus. (concave
meniscus)
Concave meniscus Alcohol thermometer is normally available in a chemical laboratory class but since mercury is
toxic, just show the class a picture or video of mercury to explain convex meniscus.
Occurs when there is stronger
adhesive force between the
container and the liquid than Compare and contrast adhesion and cohesion, and concave and convex meniscus as seen in the
the liquid’s molecules. The examples above.
adhesive force overcomes the
cohesive force of the liquid.
Adhesion - interaction between different materials touching each other e.g. Tape and
This causes the liquid to climb paper, skin and glass, etc.
up the sides of the container.
Cohesion - interaction between same materials
93
Convex meniscus The shape of the meniscus depends on the relative strength of the adhesive and cohesive forces
Occurs when there is stronger experienced by the liquid and its container.
cohesive force between the
liquid’s molecules than the Have the learners imagine what is happening between the molecules of the liquid while
adhesive force between the considering the surface of the glass container. Point out that formation of meniscus is due to the
liquid and the container. This interaction between the liquid and the container. Have the learners draw their idea on the board.
causes the liquid to create a Once the correct explanation has been shared, the teacher formalizes the explanation behind
dome shape on its surface. concave and convex meniscus.
Viscosity Compare the flow of honey and water on a spoon. Viscosity should have been introduced in
Viscosity is the resistance of a previous grades. You only need to review the definition.
liquid to flow. The more
viscous a liquid is the thicker Do a quick demonstration on viscosity by filling 6-inch test tubes with different kinds of liquid like
its consistency. In layman’s dishwashing liquid, oil, honey, shampoo, ethanol, water, etc. Fill the test tubes to about 1 cm from
term it is the measure of the the top. Stopper the test tube and invert it. Measure the time it takes for the air bubble to move
thickness of a liquid. from the bottom to the top.
In general, stronger Have the learners rank the different kinds of liquids from the fastest to the slowest. Ask the
intermolecular forces leads to learners to come up with a theory explaining the results in relation to intermolecular forces.
higher viscosity.
Increased H-bonding, like in

The liquid with the longest time is the most viscous while the one with the shortest time is the
glycerine, results to higher
least viscous. The most viscous liquid has the stronger intermolecular force and the least viscous
viscosity.
liquid has the weakest intermolecular force.
Higher surface area or
increasing molecular size also
results to greater viscosity due
to greater dispersion forces.
94
Capillary action Ask how trees bring nutrients up to its leaves. Bring an image of veins or tubes within the plant/
A phenomenon wherein a tree that act as straws that bring nutrients up to the tree. This process is a combination of capillary
liquid is able to rise up on a action and osmosis.
narrow tube. Adhesive forces
between the tube and the Show this quick video showing how a limp plant gradually gains life when placed in water
liquid allow the liquid to
http://www.edinformatics.com/math_science/surface_tension_capillary_action.htm (Last accessed
exceed its weight.
February 20, 2016)
The narrower the tube, the
higher the liquid will reach.
!
Image retrieved (May 10,
2016) from http://
water.usgs.gov/edu/
capillaryaction.html
Evaporation / vaporization Have the learners recall the meaning of evaporation or vaporization.
Evaporation is the process of
turning liquid into gaseous Learners may hypothesize the effect of intermolecular forces on this property. Ask them to
form. Weaker intermolecular determine the effect of intermolecular forces on the rate of evaporation of a substance based on
forces equates to greater what they have learned so far. Encourage them to give real life examples.
volatility.
95
Fact Sheet
Amazing Water
Point out how amazing it is that water is made from two gases that are flammable but together they make a substance that can put out fire.
These two elements bonded together allow life on earth to exist. The ability of water to form hydrogen bonds presents many interesting
properties which are useful for life.
You may give group assignment on selected topics concerning water. Each groups of 2-3 members each will create a fact sheet or a poster
showing what they have researched on.
Topics options:
1. Water and the earth. How is water stored on earth? (polar ice, underground, sea water, atmosphere). How much water does the earth
have? How does water shape land?
2. Water and the human body. How does a human being’s water content change throughout his life? (fetal stage, at birth, adulthood). How
much water do we consume in our lifetime?
3. The triple point of water (for advanced learners)
4. Water and agriculture
5. Why is water called the universal solvent?
6. Water and electricity production
7. Water and religion/ myths
8. The different shapes of water (solid, liquid, ice, snow)
9. Water and its high specific heat capacity
10. Water and its availability to all
96
Written Exam
Identify the most probable intermolecular force of attraction in the following:

Teacher&Tips:&
1. KCl ----KCl ion-ion
2. NH3——NH3 dipole-dipole, H-bonding
Knowledge about the polarity of molecules
3. Na2S——Na2S ion-ion is necessary to explain the type of
intermolecular force. Present the
4. HF——HF dipole-dipole, H-bonding
compounds visually so the learner can focus
5. MgS——MgS ion-ion on identifying the intermolecular force.
Showing their molecular geometry (hence
6. CH3OH——CH3OH dipole-dipole, H-bonding
also polarity) help the learners analyze the
7. H2——H2 dispersion forces problem.
8. CuO——CuO ion-ion
9. SbH3——SbH3 dipole-dipole
10. CO2——CO2 dispersion forces
Describe the relationship of the following properties with intermolecular forces of attraction. Choose
only two properties.
a. Boiling point / evaporation
b. Surface tension
c. Capillary action
d. Convex and concave meniscus
e. Viscosity
Boiling point - solutions with stronger intermolecular forces (IMF) have higher boiling points than
solutions with weaker intermolecular forces. The solutions with stronger IMF holds it molecules
together stronger hence making it harder for the solution to evaporate and eventually boil.
97
Surface tension - this is a phenomenon wherein a liquid creates a seemingly thin film on its surface. The stronger the IMF, the stronger is its
surface tension.
Capillary action - this is the ability of fluids to rise in narrow tubes. The IMF between the surface of the tube and the liquid allows the liquid to
rise provided that the IMF between the surface and the liquid is stronger than the cohesive forces within the liquid.
Convex and concave meniscus - a convex meniscus is formed when the cohesive forces within a liquid is stronger than the adhesive forces
between the liquid and the surface of the container. Concave meniscus on the other hand is the opposite wherein the adhesive forces is
stronger than the cohesive forces. The cohesive and adhesive forces are both due to IMF.
Viscosity - this is the measure a liquid’s resistance to flow. Generally, the stronger is the IMF in the liquid the more viscous it is.
98
Structures, Properties,
and Uses of Matter LESSON OUTLINE
Content&Standards& /&Review
The learners demonstrate an understanding on how the uses of
different materials are related to their properties and structures. Motivation String engineering activity 20
The learners shall be able to explain how the uses of different Instruction&/& Class discussion / Independent research 100
materials are related to their properties and structures.. Delivery&/&
Practice
The learners: Enrichment Video clips about Filipino inventors 10
1. Explain how the uses of the following materials depend on their
properties: (S11/12PS-IIId-e-20) Evaluation Presentation of infographic 45
a. Medical implants, prosthesis
b. Sports equipment
c. Electronic devices
d. Construction supplies for buildings and furniture Materials • Projector
e. Household gadgets • Computer (learners need computers
2. Explain how the properties of the above materials are with internet access). Should internet
determined by their structure (S11/12PS-IIId-e-21) access not available, bring print outs
of the different articles. Save the web
pages and share the soft copy with
1. Explain how the uses of the following materials depend on their
the learners
properties:
a. Medical implants, prosthesis • Materials for Silly Putty activity
b. Sports equipment Resources&
c. Electronic devices (1) Stuff of Genius - How Stuff Works (Producer). (2013, August 17).
d. Construction supplies for buildings and furniture Kevlar [Video file]. Retrieved from https://www.youtube.com/
e. Household gadgets watch?v=KFVP8A_G5VI ;
2. Explain how the properties of the above materials are (2) see additional resources at the end of the lesson
determined by their structure
99
Presentation of objectives and terms Display the objectives and terms

Communicate learning objectives and important terms review as more terms are introduced.
1. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the

suggested protocols (Verbatim, Own Words, Read-aloud):
a. We will learn how the uses and properties of the following
materials depend on their structure:
-Medical implants, prosthesis
-Electronic devices
-Construction Sports equipment
-Supplies for building and furniture
-Household gadgets

a. Polytetrafluroethylene (PTFE)
b. Kevla
c. Carbon fibers
d. Polyurethane
e. Tempered glass
f. Ultra-high strength concrete
g. Thermoplastic
100
String Engineering
Teacher&Tips:&
Present a dilemma to learners of making a piece of string strong
enough to lift a 3 kg weight. OnIn its current state, the string can
An alternative motivational activity is to
only lift a portion of the weight before it breaks. The learners need show the class a single strand of walis
to figure out how to make it stronger. tingting. Ask for its uses and encourage
creative answers. This can be a fun
interactive activity for the class.
Time limit:
Next, show a bundle of walis tingting and
Project making: 15 minutes
ask the learners its uses.
Testing: 5-7 minutes At the end of the activity, help the learners
realize that the structure of a material
relates to its properties and eventual uses.
Give the learners several material options to work:
You may use other materials as examples.
1. More string (maximum amount of 6 meters) - learners may opt
to braid
2. Tape (maximum of 3 meters) - learners can wrap the string with it
3. Glue (maximum of 1/2 cup) – learners may try to stiffen the
string
4. Rubber bands (10 pieces) - learners may try to mix materials
5. Others
The learners can do various things with the string. The only
limitation is that they must make the string strong enough to lift a 3
kg weight and that it must be at least 1/2 meter in length.
The initial string can be yarn, pisi, thin twine, paper twine, etc. as
long as it is a weak string that the learners can “engineer” to make
stronger. The weight may also be changed to practical objects such
as a heavy pot that needs to be hanged, etc.
101
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY/ PRACTICE (100 Teacher&Tips:&
MINS)
The learners may watch a video of
Stephanie Kwolek’s life to inspire them.
Class discussion / Independent research / Presentation
Stephanie Kwolek’s biography
Introduction (20 minutes)

Stephanie Kwolek accidentally invented
Inform the learners that what they did is “engineer” the string. Kevlar. Despite chemistry not being a
Materials engineering has been practiced in many fields to address popular course for women in her time,
Stephanie decided to stay in this profession
various needs. In this lesson, they will learn about various materials
and strove to make her mark. She set aside
that have been engineered throughout history and improved the her love for sewing and medicine for a more
way we do things. In particular, they will be looking into: interesting job at the DuPont Company,
doing polymer research. Stephanie Kwolek
- Polytetrafluroethylene (PTFE) - one brand is Teflon
received many awards for her work on
- Kevlar Kevlar and has been inducted in the
National Inventors Hall of Fame in 1994 as
- Carbon fibers
one of only four women members.
- Polyurethane
Source: chemistry/stephanie-kwoleks.aspx.
- Tempered glass
(Last accessed march 27, 2016).
- Ultra high-strength concrete
Giving biographies can help spark learners’
- Thermoplastic (there are many types, the learner needs to only
interest. They show the power of the human
research on one) mind and how man has shaped the world.
The challenges that these scientists faced
make them more relatable, esp. for learners
Have the learners watch a short video on Kevlar as an introduction. who are not inclined to the sciences.
The video can be found at https://www.youtube.com/watch? Consequently, these stories should also
v=KFVP8A_G5VI (last accessed March 27, 2016) make abstract concepts and theories seem
more real.
Have the learners pick any of the above materials to research on.
The activity will be done by 2-3 learners working as a group. The
learners will be making an infographic for their chosen material.
Infographics or information graphics are a representation of
information in graphic format. It uses a combination of text and
graphics that can easily be understood at a glance. They say that a
102
good infographic is worth a thousand words. Infographics may
include any of the following: statistics in the form of graphs and
charts, helpful diagrams, and timeline or short description of the
story. Teacher&Tips:&
As teacher resource, a listing of synthetic

Ask the learners to find the following: polymers and its inventors, look up the
- chemical formula of the material following weblinks:
- structure of the material Synthetic Polymers

- properties and uses http://www.chemheritage.org/discover/
online-resources/chemistry-in-history/
- how the material is manufactured themes/petrochemistry-and-synthetic-
- historical development (if available) polymers/synthetic-polymers/index.aspx
(last accessed March 27, 2016)
Consultation / Independent research and writing (80 minutes) Another useful read for teachers is:
Allow the learners enough time in class to do one-on-one Science of Plastics

consultation, independent research and to write their reports. You http://www.chemheritage.org/discover/
may do this project with the help of the English teacher. It may be online-resources/conflicts-in-chemistry/the-
used to teach research techniques. During consultation, have the case-of-plastics/all-science-of-plastics.aspx
learners bring necessary information/ articles that they need help
with and to prepare questions ahead of time. Guide the learners on The teacher may work hand-in-hand with
how to make an outline of their report as a method of doing the English, and Information and
research. Communication Technology teacher for this
project.
Presentation (45 minutes)

Teachers also have the option to explore
Have the class present their material using an infographic as their products in other fields such as:
visual. Each group presentation should span only 3-5 minutes. - Drugs
- Food
- Petrochemicals
Assessment Rubric (see in evaluation)
Below are useful websites for learners.
103
Carbon Fiber
What is Carbon Fiber? Kevlar
http://zoltek.com/carbonfiber/ (last accessed March 27, 2016) Uses and Applications of Kevlar
http://www.dupont.com/products-and-services/fabrics-fibers-
nonwovens/fibers/brands/kevlar.view-all.hlm-usesapplications-
usesapplication.html (last accessed March 27, 2016)
Polyurethane
Major Industrial Polymers. (2016). In Encyclopedia Britannica.
Retrieved from http://www.britannica.com/topic/industrial- Teflon
polymers-468698/Polyurethanes (last accessed March 27, 2016) Teflon
http://www.lenntech.com/teflon.htm (last accessed March 27, 2016)
Thermoplastic (Comfil srPET)
Facts about PET Roy J. Plunkett (inventor of Teflon)
http://www.comfil.biz/products/new-products/self-reinforced- http://www.chemheritage.org/discover/online-resources/chemistry-
plastics/srpet.php (last accessed March 27, 2016) in-history/themes/petrochemistry-and-synthetic-polymers/synthetic-
polymers/plunkett.aspx (last accessed March 27, 2016)
Nylon
Nylon: A Revolution in Textiles by Audra J. Wolfe High Strength Concrete
http://www.chemheritage.org/discover/media/magazine/articles/ High Strength Concrete
26-3-nylon-a-revolution-in-textiles.aspx (last accessed March 27, http://www.cement.org/cement-concrete-basics/products/high-
2016) strength-concrete (last accessed March 27, 2016)
Nylon Fiber Production of UHPC-Elements (English) using Ultra

http://www.fibersource.com/f-tutor/nylon.htm (last accessed March HighPerformance Concrete [video file]
27, 2016) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ftopsaGUZzs (last accessed
March 27, 2016)
Tempered glass
Tempered Glass High-Strength and High-Performance Concrete
http://www.grayglass.net/glass.cfm/Flat-Glass/Tempered-Glass-/ http://theconstructor.org/concrete/high-strength-vs-high-
catid/1/conid/217 (last accessed March 27, 2016) performance-concrete/8617/ (last accessed March 27, 2016)
104
At the end of the presentations, help the learners generalize how
chemistry played an important role in the understanding and Alternative Enrichment Activity: Silly Putty
development of these materials. Many more materials are still under
Have the class make silly putty.
research. Man will never cease finding new and innovative ways to
approach human needs.
Silly Putty (45 minutes)
Materials:
ENRICHMENT (10 MINS) a. white glue (PVA glue)

b. borax powder (can be purchased in hardware store or
Video clips about Filipino inventors laboratory supply stores)
c. beaker
Have the learners watch any of the following three videos d. food coloring
showcasing Filipino inventions. e. Popsicle sticks (glass rods have the tendency to break when
the putty becomes thick)
Filipino Inventor Plastic to Fuel f. stove (for heating water)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YMIQCEuNIpE (last accessed g. zip lock or plastic bags as storage for finished putty
March 27, 2016) Procedures
1. Mix 30 mL of warm water and 30 mL of glue in a beaker.
Filipino inventor wins gold in international competition 2. Add a few drops of your desired food coloring.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-1cCm2x-h0U (last accessed 3. In a separate beaker, mix 1 cup of water with 1 tsp borax.
March 27, 2016) 4. Mix the borax solution with the glue and stir well. Observe.
Pinoy teen behind biodegradable plastic bag Allow the learners to change the ratio of borax to water and
https://www.youtube.com/watch compare the consistencies of their putty. The putties may vary in
v=XaIpkKnmGkQ&ebc=ANyPxKowZn- elasticity, viscosity, bounciness, etc.
uivsqiVW064okwHlGPrkkg9JEPkDC-TVGVkOXHMH-6Db-
X_4RVY3jCfRsHyj7DA8sUFWb1fT9NufSnLY4xmykWQ (last accessed
Borax (tsp) to water (cup) ratio may be changed to 1:1, 1.5:1, or 2:1.
March 27, 2016)
105
Share to the class that Silly Putty was invented during World War II by James Wright of General Electric while trying to make synthetic rubber.
During the war, there was lack of rubber supply. There was a need in the US to produce more rubber for boots and tires. His discovery did not
meet the standard but it was a hit with children as a toy.
The mixture of glue and borax creates a polymer. The borax creates crosslinks between PVA polymer chains allowing it to change its properties.
Source: https://www.teachengineering.org/view_activity.php?url=collection/csu_/activities/csu_polymer/csu_polymer_lesson01_activity1.xml
(Retrieved from April 16, 2016)
106
EVALUATION (45 MINS DEPENDING ON THE NUMBER OF LEARNERS PRESENTING)
Infographic, Reporting
Excellent Merit Achieved Needs Improvement

Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pts)
Accuracy of All information are Most Information are Information is A good amount of
information accurate and well accurate and well accurate with some the information is
supported supported vague points inaccurate and/ or
vague
Organization Information is clearly Information are Information are clear Information is unclear
presented and clearly presented and and written in random
ordered in such a way ordered order
Order of information
that it brings a full
does not clearly show
picture of the material
cohesiveness
Objects Used Objects used are Objects used are Objects used are Too many objects
(diagram/image/ helpful, cohesive, and helpful, cohesive, and helpful and used
graphs/charts) positioned positioned positioned
appropriately appropriately appropriately
Objects are
positioned randomly
Amount of objects Amount of objects
used is just right used is just right
Spelling and grammar All spelling and Some spelling and Some spelling and Notable spelling and
grammar are correct grammar error grammar error grammar error
Punctuality Submitted on time Submitted on time Submitted on time Submitted after the
deadline
107
Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pts)
Infographic is
Infographic is neat Infographic is mostly Infographic appears
generally neat and
and incorporates neat and messy and poorly
incorporates
appropriate designs. incorporates designs designed
appropriate designs
Visual appeal / It is visually inviting Visually pleasing and Readable
Creativity and easy to read readable Font does not seem
Visually inviting and
Font does not seem to complement
easy to read
Uses appropriate to complement objects used
Uses appropriate
layout objects used
layout
Work is equally Work is equally Work is unequally Work is unequally
divided between divided between divided between divided between
partners partners partners partners
Teamwork
Partners are able to Partners are able to One partner One partner
communicate well communicate well accomplished more accomplished more
with each other with each other work than the other work than the other
Sources Used varied and Used varied and Used varied sources Sources are not
reliable sources reliable sources varied, some are
All sources are cited Most sources are unreliable
Most sources are
cited reliable
Few sources are cited
Most sources are
cited
108
Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pts)
Unable to relay
Explains information
Explains information Able to relay information well
with minimal errors
with minimal errors information
Presentation is hard
Presentation is easy
Presentation is easy Presentation is to follow and jumps
to follow
to follow generally easy to from one procedure
follow, required to another
Presentation Enthusiastic in
Enthusiastic in prompting once in a
presenting
presenting while Appears
disinterested
Uses appropriate Uses appropriate
Uses appropriate language and
language and Generally uses
language and gestures
gestures appropriate language
gestures
and gestures
36/9 = 4
TOTAL
Highest possible score is (4 x 9)/9 = 4 (9 Components: 8 + 1 for Presentation)
!
Adjectival Rating Rating Range Grade Range

Excellent 3.4 - 4.0 95 - 100
Merit 2.6 - 3.3 88 - 94
Achieved 1.8 - 2.5 81 - 87
Needs Improvement 1 - 1.7 75 - 80
109
Sample score sheet
Criteria Score
Accuracy of information 4
Organization 3
Objects Used (diagram/ image/
3
graphs/ charts)
Spelling and grammar 3
Punctuality 4
Visual appeal / Creativity 3
Teamwork 4
Sources 2
Presentation 4
TOTAL 30
30 pts / 9 categories = 3.3
Learner is within the Merit range and the teacher may
choose a grade within this range
110
Rouse, M. (2012). Infographics. Retrieved from http://whatis.techtarget.com/definition/infographics
Tips for Making a Great Infographic. (n.d.) Retrieved from http://teacherweb.com/LA/helencoxhs/lmb/Tips-for-Making-a-Great-Infographic.pdf
Cantancio, J. P. (uploader). (2015, July 15). Filipino Inventor Plastic to Fuel [Video file]. Retrieved from https://www.youtube.com/watch?
v=YMIQCEuNIpE
ABS-CBN News (Producer). (2015, Sept. 28). Filipino inventor wins gold in international competition [Video file]. Retrieved from https://
www.youtube.com/watch?v=-1cCm2x-h0U
ABS-CBN News (Producer). (2016, March 2). WATCH: Pinoy teen behind biodegradable plastic bag [ Video file]. Retrieved from https://
www.youtube.com/watch?v=XaIpkKnmGkQ&ebc=ANyPxKowZn-uivsqiVW064okwHlGPrkkg9JEPkDC-TVGVkOXHMH-6Db-
X_4RVY3jCfRsHyj7DA8sUFWb1fT9NufSnLY4xmykWQ
111
Biological Macromolecules
Content&Standards&
The learners demonstrate an understanding of the relationship between the LESSON OUTLINE
function and structure of biological macromolecules
The learners shall be able to distinguish the structures of different biological
Motivation Trapezoidal Tangram 5
macromolecules and relate them to their properties
Explain how the structures of carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acid and proteins, Instruction&/& Class discussion 145
and determine their properties and functions (S11/12PS-IIIe-22) Delivery&/&
Practice
Enrichment Viewing carbohydrates, proteins, and 15
lipids under a microscope
1. Distinguish between carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, and nucleic acids
2. Summarize the general characteristics of each biomolecule Evaluation Written exam, Table Summary of 10
macromolecules
3. Relate the structures of the biomolecules with their properties
Materials • Trapezoidal tangram printout
INTRODUCTION (5 MINS) • Printout of nucleic acid short
description
Presentation of objectives and terms Resources&
(1) Timberlake, K. C., (1992). Chemistry: An Introduction to
General, Organic, and Biological Chemistry 5th ed. United
1. Introduce the following learning objective using any of the suggested
States of America: HarperCollins Publishers Inc.;
protocols (Verbatim, Own Words, Read-aloud):
(2) McMurry, J. E., Fay, R. C., (2008). Chemistry 5th ed. United
a. Explain how the structures of carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids, and States of America: Pearson Prentice Hall.
proteins determine their properties and functions (3) Boyer, R., (2006). Concepts in Biochemistry 3rd ed. Asia: John
Wiley & Sons Inc
112
a. Carbohydrates m. Nucleic acid
b. Saccharides n. Nucleotides
c. Glycosidic bond o. Phosphodiester bond
d. Proteins p. Amphiphilic
e. Amino acid q. Hydrophilic tendency
f. Peptide bond r. Hydrophobic tendency
g. Lipids s. Functional group
h. Triglyceride t. Carboxylic acid
i. Glycerol u. Alcohol
j. Fatty acid v. Amine
k. Phospholipids w. Fischer structure
l. Steroids x. Haworth structure
MOTIVATION (5 MINS)
Trapezoidal Tangram
Teacher&Tips:&
Trapezoidal Tangram
Cut out puzzle pieces out of thick paper print-outs. Group the learners in pairs or by three’s and For this puzzle activity, you can use wood
have them form the different shapes using puzzle pieces. blocks, lego pieces or other similar
inexpensive toys.
Show how different configurations or shapes can be formed from identical pieces. Explain that this
is similar to how macromolecules are comprised mainly of carbon, hydrogen, oxygen and nitrogen,
and yet many different substances are formed, all with varied properties.
The different puzzle pieces can represent different elements upon which, depending on orientation
with different pieces, creates a different pattern or “biomolecule”.
113
Trapezoidal Tangram
• Study where all the stuff in the universe came from.
• See how our understanding of all stuff has changed and continues to change.
• Try to find answers as to why stuff is a certain way and why it changes in certain ways.
• Develop an appreciation of why stuff is important in our daily lives.
2. Introduce the learning objective below using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim, Own
Words, Read-aloud):
a. I can give evidence for and explain the formation of the light elements in the Big Bang
theory.
3. Introduce the following list of important terms that learners will encounter:
• Cosmology Teacher&Tips:&
6. There are several limitations and
• Big Bang theory/Big Bang model misconceptions associated with discussing
• Singularity the Big Bang Theory. Keep in mind the
following:
• Inflation • The Big Bang refers to the very
• Annihilation start of the whole process called the Big
Bang model.
• Recombination • The Big Bang was NOT an
• Redshift explosion that carried matter outward from
a point. It refers to the rapid inflation of
• Relative abundance space itself.
• Cosmic microwave background • The theory does not explain what
caused it or where the singularity came
from, BUT the Big Bang model does not
MOTIVATION (15 MINS) need a cause to be a valid theory. It simply
needs to show that observations and
evidence validate its assumptions. The
Class discussion
model is a work in progress that we are still
finding evidence for until now.
Have the learners review their lesson on carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and nucleic acids from
114
Grade 10 Chemistry. Help them recall how the macromolecules were composed of very few
elements, namely carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, and nitrogen. They should also have seen the
structures.
Start the discussion with carbohydrates, followed by proteins, lipids then, nucleic acids. Let there be
a gradual build up as the structures become more complicated.
Teacher&Tips:&
7. Clarify key features and limitations of the
Carbohydrates (30 minutes) demonstration:
• Similar to the Big Bang, a balloon
expands very rapidly at the start, then more
Show the Fischer structure and chemical formula of glucose. slowly when it has already inflated. But
some evidence shows that the expansion is
now accelerating again.
Using the guide questions, lead the learners into the discussion of carbohydrates. • The balloon is the universe and space
itself. There is no classroom for it to expand
into.
Guide questions: You may have them conduct this activity
outside of class to save time.
1. What elements do you see in the structure/ formula? C, H, O
2. What do you notice with the chemical formula of glucose?
- the number of C and O atoms are the same
- the number of H atoms is double that of the C and O atoms
- the formula can be rewritten as C6 (H2O)6
(given this formula, it seems that carbohydrate is composed of carbon and water)
Show the different structures of Haworth carbohydrates of monosaccharide and disaccharide, and
polysaccharide).
Using the guide questions, lead the learners into the discussion of different kinds of carbohydrates.
Guide questions:
1. What similarities do you see in the structures?
- they have similar units (hexagon units)
- they have the same elements
115
2. What differences do you see in the structures?
- they have varying lengths - some have one, two, and many subunits
Introduce the terms and definition of saccharide, monosaccharide, disaccharide, and polysaccharide. Give examples and sources of the
different saccharides. Connect the discussions with the different functions of the different saccharides. You may let the learners draw the
function based on the different sources. For example, fructose (example) can be found in fruits (source), and fruits are sources of energy
(function). Another would be cellulose (example) which can be found in plant stems, leaves, bark, roots which serves as the structural material of
plants (function).
Compare monosaccharides and disaccharides with polysaccharides to show the relationship of structure and property/function. Point out that
there is rigidifying of the molecules as more saccharides are attached and more branches are created. In the process of creating longer chains,
water is being released. This can be related to loss of mobility/flexibility of polysaccharides. These molecules are also less soluble in water.
Helpful content:
Carbohydrate
The word carbohydrate may be broken down to carbon and hydrate. From the chemical formula of carbohydrate, notice that the ratio of
C:H:O is 1:2:1, which can be rewritten as Cn(H2O)n. Carbohydrates can be seen as hydrates of carbon. This is a traditional but incorrect
understanding of carbohydrates but it still presents a useful picture of the molecule. Another term for carbohydrate is saccharide. This term
is derived from the Latin word saccharum referring to sugar--a common carbohydrate.
Carbohydrates are classified either as simple or complex. Simple sugars are monosaccharides and disaccharides. Complex sugars are
polysaccharides.
Carbohydrates are the primary energy source of the human body. The different saccharides that humans eat are converted to glucose which
can be readily used by the body. Around 4 kilocalories is derived from one gram of carbohydrate. Should there be an excessive consumption
of carbohydrates, the excess is converted to glycogen which is stored in the liver and in muscles. Glycogen is a slow-releasing carbohydrate.
116
Monosaccharide (one saccharide)
Glucose Used in dextrose, blood sugar; the form utilized by the human body
Galactose Found in milk and milk products
Fructose Found in fruits and honey Teacher&Tips:&
The above monosaccharides all have the same chemical formula of C6H12O6 and its structure is Mention that glucose, galactose, and
fructose are isomers or compounds that
the one that made the difference in its properties. For example, galactose (163-169oC) has a have the same molecular but different
higher melting point than glucose (148-155oC). Glucose is sweeter than galactose. structural formulas.
Melting point of glucose is for β-D-glucose. Pictures of α and β glycosidic bonds may be
(Santa Cruz Biotechnology, Inc. 2007-2016, Retrieved March 25, 2016, from http://www.scbt.com/ used to show their differences. There is no
need to elaborate on the formation of the
datasheet-291973.html) two bonds.
Melting point of galactose is for D-galactose.

(ChemicalBook, (2016). Retrieved March 25, 2016, from
http://www.chemicalbook.com/ProductMSDSDetailCB1327034_EN.htm)
Disaccharide (two saccharides)

Maltose Glucose + Glucose Found in malt
Sucrose Glucose + Fructose Found in regular table sugar, sugarcane, and sugar beet
Lactose Glucose + Galactose Found in milk and milk products
Individual saccharides are connected via glycosidic bonds. A water molecule is released when
two saccharides are combined.
117
Teacher&Tips:&
Image retrieved March 26, 2016 from http://
namrataheda.blogspot.com/2013/04/
biomolecules-of-cell-carbohydrates-
part_16.html
13. The piece may be linked to or used in

discussions in English, Philosophy or Social
Sciences.
Polysaccharide (many saccharides)

Starch / Amylose Composed of 250 - 400 glucose molecules connected via α-1-4-
glycosidic bond
Storage form of glucose in plants
118
Amylopectin Like amylose but has more branches attached via α-1-6 glycosidic bond
Storage form of glucose in plants
Glycogen Composed of more glucose, more highly branched (same type of bond
as amylopectin)
Storage form of glucose in animals, stored in the liver and muscles
Cellulose Composed of glucose units connected via β-1-4 glycosidic bond,

linear chain arranged in a parallel manner
Structural material in plants--cell wall in wood, wood fiber
Cannot be digested by humans
Below are the structures of some carbohydrates:
Fischer structure of various monosaccharides
Teacher&Tips:&
Show a sample Haworth structure to

prepare the learners for the nucleic acid
lecture.
Explain the D and L, and α and β forms very
briefly with the help of images.
Figure 1. Retrieved March 25, 2016, from http://butane.chem.uiuc.edu/cyerkes/

Chem104ACSpring2009/Lecture_Notes_104/lect23c.html
119
Haworth Structure of Glucose
Figure 2. Retrieved March 25, 2016, from http://www.chem.latech.edu/~upali/chem102/121c7.htm
Figure 3. Retrieved March 25, 2016, from https://biochem80p.files.wordpress.com/2014/02/glucose-fructose-sucrose.jpg

120
Figure 4. Retrieved March 25, 2016, from https://www.rpi.edu/dept/bcbp/molbiochem/MBWeb/mb1/part2/sugar.htm
121
Figure 5. Retrieved March 25, 2016, from http://cnx.org/resources/ff24547bd43194a91783d82f3b805b5c/
219_Three_Important_Polysaccharides-01.jpg
Recall
On the next day of lesson, ask the learners to create a mind map of the things that they remember about carbohydrates. Ask them to try and
include the rough structure, elements found in carbohydrates
- different examples
- sources and connect these to its function
- general classification (mono-, di-, polysaccharide)
This is an exercise to determine which concepts the learners understood clearly and which ones need strengthening. Allow a few minutes to
clarify concepts before proceeding to the next lesson.
Protein
Ask the learners what they had for breakfast or lunch. As the learners give their answers, write on the board the different proteins found in the
food they mentioned. Ask the learners what they think the functions of proteins are. One possible answer that they may give is that protein is a
122
good energy source. Mention that proteins, like carbohydrates gives 4 kilocalories of energy per gram but they are not all used up by the body
as primary energy source. Explain that protein is more than just a good energy source. Proteins have other structural and enzymatic functions
that are important to the human body. They act as transport, storage and as antibodies. You can focus on two to three examples of proteins
with different functions to relate structure to function/properties.
Introduce amino acids with a picture. Ask the learners what element is different from carbohydrates and proteins. Mention that proteins are
composed of amino acids in the similar way that carbohydrates are composed of saccharides. Depending on the sequence of the different
amino acids, proteins will acquire certain structure and functions. Show the list and classification of amino acids and very briefly go through
different categories to emphasize the wide variation in proteins.
Give two to three examples to emphasize the objective of relating structure to properties and functions.
Helpful content:
Protein
The word protein came from the Greek term proteios meaning first. One can think of protein as the beginning of life. From egg albumin
being pure protein to sperm and egg cells, we all start from proteins. Proteins are composed of four elements, namely, carbon, hydrogen,
oxygen and nitrogen. Sulfur and other metals are sometimes also found in proteins. If carbohydrates are made up of saccharides, proteins
are made up of amino acids. An amino acid is a molecule that has an amine and a carboxyl group. Below is the structure of an amino acid:
Figure 6. Retrieved March 25, 2016, from http://study.com/academy/lesson/what-are-amino-acids-definition-structure-quiz.html
123
There are 20 amino acids. The combination of many amino acids creates protein. Amino acids are
joined together with a peptide bond. Proteins are also called polypeptides.
The diagram below shows that water is released in the formation of peptide bonds. This is similar to
the formation of complex saccharides.
Teacher&Tips:&
Hydrophobic and hydrophilic tendencies are

recurring properties among biomolecules. It
has an important effect on the configuration
that biomolecules acquire.
Figure 7. Retrieved March 25, 2016, from http://study.com/academy/lesson/peptide-bond-

definition-formation-structure.html
Different types of proteins are composed of different combinations of amino acids arranged in a
specific way. Depending on the order of the amino acids, the protein will acquire a certain
configuration and function. The configuration is governed by several factors, namely:
124
a. H-bonding between amino acids which creates either a helical structure or a pleated sheet
b. Disulfide bonds for amino acids containing sulfur
c. Salt bridges
d. Hydrophobic and hydrophilic tendencies
Teacher&Tips:&
Choose two to three proteins as examples.
Figure 8. Retrieved March 26, 2016, from https://www.boundless.com/biology/textbooks/

boundless-biology-textbook/biological-macromolecules-3/proteins-56/protein-structure-304-11437/
Protein can acquire many configurations. Common examples are α-helix and β-pleated sheets.
Examples of proteins and their structure and functions are:
Keratin
Keratin is a structural protein found in hair, skin, and nails. It is a highly cross-linked protein
containing α-helix and β-pleated sheets. Sheep’s wool is made largely of keratin.
125
Figure 9. Retrieved March 25,2016, from http://kriyasbeautyspa.blogspot.com/2014/12/hair-structure.html
Fibroin / Silk protein

Fibroin is found in silk. Silk has a smooth and soft texture. It is one of the strongest natural fibers that have high resistance to deformation. It is
also a good insulation. Silk is primarily composed of β-pleated sheets. The long polypeptide chain doubles back on its own running parallel
connected together by H-bonds.
126
Figure 10. Retrieved March 26, 2016 from https://www.boundless.com/biology/textbooks/1514/biological-macromolecules-3/proteins-56/
protein-structure-304-11437
Figure 11. Silk cocoons. Retrieved March 26, 2016 from http://www.artofsilk.com/blogs/news/6314356-an-introduction-to-silk-cultivation-
sericulture#.VvXiGOJ97IU
127
Collagen
Collagen is a major insoluble fibrous protein found in connective tissues such as tendons, ligaments, skin, cartilage and the cornea of the eye. It
comprises as much as 30% of proteins in animals. Its strength is attributed to its triple helix structure comprising of α-helices braided together.
When several triple helices combine, they form the fibrils that make up connective tissues.
Figure 12. Retrieved March 26, 2016, from http://www.sigmaaldrich.com/life-science/metabolomics/enzyme-explorer/learning-center/

structural-proteins/collagen.html
Enzymes function to catalyze chemical reactions. They either speed up a reaction, lower the needed energy for a reaction to take place, or bind
substances to their specific partners. Enzymes themselves are very specific as can be seen in their shape. Examples of enzymes are below:
1. Lipase - help in digestion of fats

2. Pepsin - help in breaking down proteins into peptides (smaller units)
3. Sucrase - also called invertase, help in the digestion of sugars and starches
128
(a) Human Pancreatic Lipase (b) Pepsin (c) Sucrase or Invertase
Figure 13. Lipase Retrieved May 8, 2016, from http://www.rcsb.org/pdb/explore.do?structureId=2PPL

Figure 14. Pepsin Retrieved May 8, 2016, from http://www.rcsb.org/pdb/explore.do?structureId=1PSN
Figure 15. Sucrase or Invertase Retrieved May 9, 2016, from https://www.colourbox.com/image/invertase-an-enzyme-that-catalyzes-the-
hydrolysis-breakdown-of-sucrose-table-sugar-3d-molecular-structure-image-5539397
Myoglobin
Myoglobin is a polypeptide that stores oxygen in muscles. It is a globular protein comprised of 153 amino acids in a single polypeptide chain. It
contains a heme group which has an iron (II) ion at its center. This is where the oxygen is stored.
Heme group
Figure 16. Retrieved March 26, 2016, from

http://wps.prenhall.com/wps/media/objects/
3313/3393071/blb2402.html
129
Hemoglobin
Hemoglobin is a globular protein that carries oxygen from the lungs to the bloodstream. It is composed of four sub-units, each containing a
heme group that enables it to transport four oxygen molecules at a time.
Figure 17. Retrieved March 26, 2016, from https://www.worldofchemicals.com/271/chemistry-articles/max-ferdinand-perutz-determined-

hemoglobin-structure.html
The samples given are only a few of the thousands upon thousands of proteins.
Recall
On the next day of lesson, ask the learners to create a mind map of the things that they remember about proteins. Ask them to try and include
elements found in proteins. Have them site different examples and sources and connect them to the functions.
Allocate a few minutes for clarification.
130
Teacher&Tips:&
Lipids
Limit the discussion on lipids to triglycerides
Ask learners what they know about fats and oils. Expect answers relating to sources, health benefits, and phospholipids as these are enough
harmful effects and properties such as insolubility in water. Mention that lipids provide more energy examples to meet the objective of relating
structure to function and properties.
per gram than carbohydrates and proteins They provide 9 kilocalories of energy per gram! Aside
Should some learners inquire, below is a
from being an energy source or storage, lipids also serve other functions such as material for cell short description of wax and steroid.
membrane, insulation to maintain body temperature, aid in digestion, and as signal molecules.
Show the structure of a triglyceride and ask the learners what they notice in the picture. Answers can
be:
- it has three chains connected to a backbone
- it has long chains mainly composed of C and H
- it is composed of C, H, O
Wax
Proceed to the different classifications of lipids. Enumerate the different classifications: triglyceride, Wax is a combination of alcohol and a
phospholipid, wax, and steroid. Mention that the lipid family is one of the most varied in terms of saturated fatty acid. It is solid at room
structure but they share the common property of being insoluble in water. temperature but melts easily. It is found in
plants and animals. It serves as coating of
leaves and fruits in plants. Animals also have
Begin with triglycerides and discuss its parts. Describe the difference between saturated and it in feathers and skin as protection.
Common examples of wax are beeswax
unsaturated fatty acids. Pictures will help to compare and contrast a saturated and an unsaturated
from honeycomb, carnauba wax from palm
fatty acid. Relate degree of saturation to the properties and the effects on human health of the two trees, and spermaceti wax from whale fat
types of fatty acids. Give examples of sources of saturated and unsaturated fatty acids. Emphasize (used by sailors for candles in olden times).
that the long-chain hydrocarbon (HC) is responsible for making triglycerides insoluble in water. The
longer the HC chain, the more the lipid is insoluble in water.
Show a picture of a phospholipid and ask the learners what they see. Answers can be:
- there are only two long chains and one short one
- the long chains are composed of C, H, and O (mostly C and H)
- there is phosphorus in the structure (that is why it is called phospholipid)
131
Mention that phospholipids are interesting lipids because they are soluble in water. This is due to the
phosphate part of its structure. Phospholipids are amphiphilic, it has a water-loving head (phosphate Teacher&Tips:&
group) and a water-fearing tail (long-chain HC).
Show a picture of a phospholipid bilayer and ask the learners what they notice. Answers can be:
- all the circular part is oriented outwards and the long strips are inward
- it is like a sandwich, where the crust is outside and the filling inside
Proceed to the function of the phospholipid bilayer in cells.
Helpful content:
Image: Retrieved March 26,2016, from
http://people.uwplatt.edu/~sundin/363-7/
Lipids image/l637-35a.gif
The word lipid comes from the Greek word lipos which means fat. Lipids are a family of biomolecules
having varied structures. They are grouped together simply because of their hydrophilic property
(water-fearing). They are soluble in non-polar solvents such as ether, acetone, and benzene. Lipids
can be classified into four categories:
a. Wax
b. Triglycerides
c. Phospholipids
d. Steroids
The discussion on lipids will be limited to fatty acids, triglycerides, and phospholipids as these are
enough examples to show the relationship of lipid structure to function and properties.
Fatty acids
Understanding fatty acids is essential to understanding lipids. Fatty acids are long-chain carboxylic
acids that are insoluble in water. Fatty acids can be saturated or unsaturated. Saturated fatty acids
contain single bonds in its hydro-carbon chain whereas unsaturated fatty acids contain double
bonds.
132
Teacher&Tips:&
Steroid
Steroid came from the Greek word stereos
meaning solid. It is composed of fused-ring
structures, namely, three six-membered ring
and a five-membered ring. The steroid
groups is very wide, ranging from sterol and
bile acid to sex hormones to adrenal
hormones to hormones regulating the
molting of insects and many more.
Cholesterol is one of the most common
steroids. It is amphiphilic, meaning that it
has a polar head and an extensive non-polar
tail. Cholesterol is a precursor for steroid
hormone synthesis and is also used in
membrane construction. Other common
steroids are estradiol, a form of estrogen,
Figure 18. Retrieved March 26, 2016, from https://authoritynutrition.com/saturated-fat-good-or- and testosterone. Testosterone is produced
by the male testis and is responsible for the
bad/ development of the male sex organ and
masculine characteristics. Estradiol, on the
other hand, is responsible for the
An easy way to remember saturated fatty acids is to think of them as “saturated” with hydrogen. All development of female sex organs,
the carbon molecules have two hydrogen atoms attached to it. In unsaturated fatty acids, carbons menstrual cycle and other feminine
with a double bond only have one hydrogen atom attached to it hence being “unsaturated.” qualities.
Saturated fatty acids allow their molecules to fit close together and form strong attraction. They
usually have high melting points and are solid at room temperature. Unsaturated fatty acids are bent
because of the double bond and are therefore, not as close together as saturated fatty acids. They
are often irregularly shaped. Unsaturated fatty acids have a low melting point and are liquid at room
temperature. Lipids containing either saturated or unsaturated fatty acids somehow are able to
retain these properties.
Triglyceride Image: Retrieved March 26, 2016, from

http://www.britannica.com/science/steroid
Fat and oil are the most common examples of lipids. They are under triglycerides because they are
composed of glycerol and three fatty acids.
133
Teacher&Tips:&

https://www.boundless.com/biology/
textbooks/1514/the-endocrine-system-37/
types-of-hormones-210/lipid-derived-
amino-acid-derived-and-peptide-
hormones-793-12028/
Figure 19. Retrieved March 26, 2016, from http://s3.amazonaws.com/answer-board-image/

c44604e7-2231-4d43-94e0-b7e53b1bff83.gif
Fat refers to solid triglyceride usually from animal sources such as meat, milk, butter, margarine,
eggs, and cheese. Oil refers to liquid triglycerides from plant sources. Examples are olive oil, corn
oil, sunflower oil, and soybean oil. Animal fat contains high percentages of saturated fatty acids while
plant oil are mostly unsaturated fatty acids.
134
Phospholipids
Phospholipids contains glycerol, two fatty acids, and a phosphate group. Unlike other lipids, phospholipids have a polar and non-polar end.
This property allows it to transport molecules in the bloodstream. It is also a major component in the cell membrane. The two parts of a
phospholipid can be termed as the hydrophilic head (phosphate group) and hydrophobic tail (fatty acid group). This dual property allows
phospholipids to form a phospholipid bilayer. In this configuration, the hydrophilic head sticks out while the hydrophobic tail is tucked in and
away from the watery environment. This is why phospholipids are suitable as cell membrane.  

https://www.penflip.com/rdburgon/une-organic-
chemistry-i-helper/blob/master/chapter-16.txt

https://www.boundless.com/biology/textbooks/
1514/biological-macromolecules-3/lipids-55/
135
Figure 21. Retrieved March 26, 2016, from https://www.boundless.com/biology/textbooks/1514/biological-macromolecules-3/lipids-55/
phospholipids-300-11433/
Recall
The following day, ask the learners to create a mind map of the things that they remember about lipids. Help them by asking them to strive to
incorporate the following:
- elements found in lipids
- different classifications of lipids
- different examples and connect these to its function
Allocate a few minutes to clarify concepts, afterwards proceed to nucleic acid.
136
Nucleic Acid
Have the learners read the short description of nucleic acids below. This can be done as a homework or as a class activity. Have the learners
answer the following questions after reading the text. They can work on this by pairs.
Once the learners are done answering the questions, the teacher goes through them one by one in class and asks learners to share their
answers. The teacher can clarify, reiterate, add, or correct the learners’ answers during this process. This will sum up the discussion on nucleic
acid.
Short reading for Nucleic Acid

Nucleic Acid
Nucleic acids play an essential role in the storage, transfer, and expression of genetic information. Nucleic acid was discovered by a twenty-four-
year-old Swiss physician named Friedrich Miescher in 1868. He was puzzled that an unknown substance in white blood cells did not resemble
carbohydrates, proteins, or lipids. He was able to isolate the substance from the nucleus and initially called it nuclein. He eventually was able to
break down nuclein into protein and nucleic acids. He found out that nucleic acids contain carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, and
phosphorus.
The most common examples of nucleic acids are DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) and RNA(ribonucleic acid). DNA is a nucleic acid that carries the
genetic code of organisms. It is fondly termed as the blueprint of life. RNA, on another hand, carries the information from the DNA to the
cellular factories for the synthesis of proteins. If carbohydrates are composed of saccharide units, proteins of amino acids, and lipids of fatty
acids, nucleic acids are composed of nucleotides. Nucleic acids are also known as polynucleotides. A nucleotide has three parts:
a. Nitrogenous base
b. Five-carbon carbohydrate or sugar
c. Phosphate group
137
Figure 23. Retrieved March 26, 2016, from http://study.com/academy/lesson/nucleotides-structure-components-quiz.html
The nitrogenous bases of DNA and RNA are:

DNA’s : Adenine (A), Guanine (G), Cytosine (C), and Thymine (T)
RNA’s : Adenine (A), Guanine (G), Cytosine (C), and Uracil (U)
DNA has a different sugar group than RNA. DNA has deoxyribose while RNA has ribose.
138
Figure 24. Retrieved May 9, 2016, from http://www.shutterstock.com/pic-108466967/stock-vector-vector-dna-and-rna.html
The drawing above shows that DNA is double stranded and RNA is single stranded. The bases are paired up as can be seen in DNA. The bases
C and G have three H-bonds between them, and A and T have two. Hydrogen bonding is greatly responsible for the shape of both RNA and
DNA. The different nucleotides are connected in a chain via phosphodiester bonds.
139
Phospodiester bond
Figure 25. Retrieved March 26, 2016 from http://www.chem.ucla.edu/harding/IGOC/N/nucleic_acid.html
The sequence of the base pairs in one’s DNA is unique for every organism (except for identical twins). The DNA and the cell containing it
determine the kind of protein that will be synthesized. The different proteins are then responsible for the processes that carbohydrates, lipids,
proteins, and other substances in the body undertake.
140
Guide questions:
1. Why are nucleic acids named so?
- Around 1868, Friedrich Miescher isolated an unknown weakly acidic substance from the nucleus of white blood cells, hence the term
nucleic acid.
2. What comprises nucleic acids?
- Nucleic acids are composed of nucleotides.
3. What is another term for nucleic acids?
- Nucleic acids are also known as polynucleotides.
4. What are the three parts of a nucleotide?
- A nucleotide has a five-carbon sugar, a phosphate group and a nitrogenous base
5. What are common examples of nucleic acids?
- DNA and RNA
6. What is the primary role of DNA?
- It is the blueprint of life. Our genetic code is found in the DNA.
7. How does RNA help in protein synthesis?
- RNA helps in protein synthesis by carrying out the instructions encoded in the DNA.
8. What are the bases of DNA? of RNA?
- DNA: Adenine, Guanine, Tyrosine, Cytosine RNA: Adenine, Guanine, Uracil, Cytosine
9. How are DNA and RNA similar?
- They have the same three bases: A, G, C.
- They both have nucleotides containing one phosphate group, a five-carbon sugar, and a nitrogenous base.
- Both are used in the manufacture of proteins
10. How are DNA and RNA different?
- DNA is double stranded while RNA is single strand
- DNA has deoxyribose for its sugar while RNA has ribose
- DNA has thymine while RNA has uracil
141
ENRICHMENT (15 MINS) Teacher&Tips:&
Table Summary Show the learners a fun biomolecules music

video on Youtube. The song was created by
Have the learner summarize their understanding by filling up the table below. This activity is done by a high school teacher to the tune of
pairs. Gangnam Style. Below are the lyrics of the
song.
Molecules Gone Wild! 

Description Carbohydrates Proteins Lipids Nucleic Acids Bio Style! 
Video published on October 4, 2012 by
scienceteacherhsu at
Elements found in C, H, O C, H, O, N C, H, O C, H, O, N, P https://www.youtube.com/watch?
this biomolecule Sometimes S and Can be with P for v=nt9u7CfVoc4 (last accessed April 21,
are... (1 pt each) other metals also phospholipids 2016)
 
The role or function Primary source Structural material Source of energy Protein synthesis Carbohydrates provide the energy for your
of this biomolecule of energy in the Enzyme Maintaining body Code of life life! 
is/ are...(3 pts each) body Storage molecule heat The simplest form, like glucose, is known as
a monosaccharide 
Structural Transport molecule Aid in digestion
Combine two, and make a larger sugar
material in Antibody Material for cell called disaccharide 
plants membrane The largest is a polysaccharide! 
Signal molecules  
Lipids are the fats! 
3 fatty acids with a glycerol make up the
fats: 
This biomolecule can Bread, rice, Meat, dairy Oil, butter, nuts, --- Triglycerides with only single bonds are
saturated fats, 
be found in foods fruits, grains, products, nuts, egg fish
But if there're double bonds they now
like...(give at least root crops, become unsaturated fats 
two, 1 pt each) sugar Don't eat too much fat! 
Monomers build to polymers filled 

With C, H, O! Hey! 
Molecule's macro! Hey! 
142
Teacher&Tips:&
The sub-units of Saccharides Amino acids Fatty acids Nucleotides  
these molecules (technically, there One with HO, other with H, so 
are...(1 pt each) is not one Bond and go! Hey! 
uniform subunit Release H2O! Hey! 
 
for lipids)
Dehydration Synthesis is underway!!! 
The different kinds of Monosaccharid Structural Triglycerides (fat ---  
this biomolecule e Enzyme and oil)
Bio Style 
are...(3 pts each) Disaccharide Transport Phospholipids Mol-Mol-Mol-Mol Molecules Gone Wild! 
Polysaccharide Storage Wax Bio Style 
Antibody Steroid Mol-Mol-Mol-Mol Molecules Gone Wild! 
 
Examples of this Sucrose, Keratin, collagen, Canola oil, palm DNA, RNA Many Polymers-mers-mers-mers: 
biomolecule are... glucose, hemoglobin, etc. oil, margarine, Molecules Gone Wild! 
(give at least two, 1 glycogen, butter, etc. Many Polymers-mers-mers-mers! 
 
pt each) cellulose, etc.
Proteins: the building blocks that make up
your whole body 
TOTAL : 48 points Your skin, your hair, your muscles - need
protein to get the hotties! 
Break down polypeptide to amino acids in
ALTERNATIVE ENRICHMENT your body 
Nitrogen comes to the party! 
 
Biomolecule poem Nucleic Acids! 
The famous one is DNA that's known by all
For a homework, ask the learners (2-3 per group) to create a short poem describing what they have you kids 
learned about biomolecules. Provide motivation by writing a poem yourself as an example. This is a With 2 polynucleotide chains linked to make
fun yet difficult activity as it requires the learners to summarize the topics and creatively translate it valid, 
Which breaks into single nucleotides when
them into a poem. Give learners fifteen minutes to consult with each other as a team. Have the
it's digested; 
learners post their poems in the room for the class to read. Phosphorous added! 
Criteria
Accuracy of information 50 %
Creativity 40 %
Team work 10 %
143
Teacher&Tips:&
 
When you eat food, to get in the mood (to
EVALUATION study), 
Molecules will flow! Hey! 
Written exam, Table Summary or Poem Straight down your throat! Hey! 
 
Need to break those big polymers, so 
Written exam Here's H2O! Hey! 
Splits to H and O! Hey! 
I. True or False (1 pt each)  
1. Sucrose is a disaccharide Hydrolysis is what I just now displayed!!! 
 
2. Starch is composed of many glucose units Molecules Gone Wild! 
3. Fructose is also known as blood sugar Bio Style 
Mol-Mol-Mol-Mol Molecules Gone Wild! 
4. Keratin is easily dissolved in water Bio Style 
5. Proteins are made up of nucleotides Mol-Mol-Mol-Mol Molecules Gone Wild! 
 
6. The iron group of hemoglobin is called a heme group Many Polymers-mers-mers-mers: 
7. A nucleotide has three parts: nitrogenous base, sugar, and phosphate group Molecules Gone Wild! 
Many Polymers-mers-mers-mers! 
8. DNA has a double helix structure  
9. Triglyceride is a protein Food deforms 
Into its simplest forms! 
10. Generally, unsaturated fatty acids remain solid at room temperature When you eat it, break it down, 
Then it reforms! 
 
Alternative Exercise: Short essay Now you're informed! 
Essay questions: So please study more! 
Study, Study, 
1. How is glucose different from cellulose? Give your answer in terms of structure and properties. Read your notes and textbook 
2. Draw the structure of collagen and describe how its structure relates to its function as a  
You know what I'm saying? 
connective tissue?
 
3. Draw a sketch of a phospholipid bilayer and describe why the structure is such. Molecules Gone Wild! 
 
4. What are the similarities and differences of DNA and RNA?
Many Polymers-mers-mers-mers: 
Many Polymers-mers-mers-mers! 
ANSWER KEY: True or False (1 pt each)
 
1)TRUE 2)TRUE 3)FALSE 4)FALSE 5)FALSE 6)TRUE 7)TRUE 8)TRUE 9)FALSE 10)FALSE Molecules Gone Wild!
144
4. Briefly define cosmology as the study of how the universe began, how it continues to exist, and how it will end. Offer examples of
cosmologies from different religions and cultures based on their beliefs. You may ask for examples from the class. Challenge the class: Do you
think there is proof that any of these stories or cosmologies are true?
Ask why different cultures have the need to explain where they came from and how the world was created.
5. Explain that science brings forth a cosmological theory, not from belief, but from scientific evidence that the universe once began to expand
and continues to expand until today. This theory was eventually called the Big Bang theory or Big Bang model. Astronomers George Lemaître
and Edwin Hubble were some of its first proponents.
Mention that George Lemaître was a Catholic priest. He did not find his theory (or science as a whole) incompatible with his religion. Ask for
possible reasons why some people think science goes against what they believe in.

Key points, Illustration of expansion, Nucleosynthesis reactions, and Proofs of the Big Bang Model
6. Use a chart or diagram to discuss the key stages of the Big Bang model.
a. The universe may have begun as an infinitely hot and dense initial singularity, a point with all of space, time, matter and energy. This
means that there was no where, when or what. There is no space around the singularity – just nothingness.
145
b. All of it then began to rapidly expand in a process known as inflation. Space itself expanded faster than the speed of light. In this still hot
and dense mass of the universe, pairs of matter and antimatter (quarks and antiquarks) were formed from energy, but these pairs cancelled
each other back into energy (annihilation).
c. The universe cooled down as it expanded. An excess of matter (electrons, protons, neutrons and other particles) somehow came to be in
a highly energetic “plasma soup.” Photons (light particles) were being scattered everywhere in this “soup”. Protons and neutrons came
together to form different types of nuclei by nucleosynthesis or nuclear fusion.
d. Much later on, electrons started to bind to ionized protons and nuclei forming neutral atoms in a process called recombination. The
bound particles no longer scattered photons so light and energy moved freely across space. The period was hence known as the “dark
ages”.
e. Gravity caused these atoms to collapse onto one another to form stars and galaxies and eventually, other matter. This still happens until
today. Space also continues to expand at an accelerating rate, thus increasing the distance between the matters inside it.
7. Conduct a group activity that attempts to model cosmic inflation.

Have learners provide the following:
• Balloons
• Balloon pump (optional)
• Small stickers (any design)
Instructions:
a. Stick small stickers randomly on the surface of the uninflated balloon.
b. Quickly inflate the balloon with a pump or your breath. Observe the stickers.
c. Answer the following questions:
• Why do the stickers appear to be moving away from each other?
• Are the stickers moving across the balloon?
• Do the stickers themselves grow in size?
Briefly discuss how using different instruments can enable us to detect the light of other galaxies. This light is found to be redshifted (the light
looks “stretched”). This suggests that other galaxies are moving farther away from ours. It was later determined that they are not moving away.
Instead, space itself is expanding in all directions causing all the galaxies to be relatively farther apart. From this “redshift” we learn how fast the
universe is expanding. Redshift is the first piece of evidence for the Big Bang model.
146
8. Focus on nucleosynthesis and how free protons and neutrons would routinely combine and separate from each other due to the high
energies at the time. Present the diagram that shows the most significant reactions that occurred. Discuss the reactions by balancing proton and
neutron count, given the compositions of the nuclei:
Point out that due to the rapid cooling due to expansion, nucleosynthesis ground to a halt about three minutes after the Big Bang occurred.
This left us with mostly H isotopes (p, D and T), He isotopes and a very tiny bit of other elements like Li. The relative
abundance of He and H did not change much until today.
Figure 2. Significant nuclear reactions during Big Bang nucleosynthesis. 
Clarify the diagram:

• These are not the only reactions that occurred but these were the most significant.
• Given the (a, b) format in the diagram, it is a that reacts with the particle while it is b that is produced or removed. γ is the symbol for
gamma radiation.
• You may use an accounting approach to count. Place the number of each particle on each side and balance like a money sheet:
e.g. 3He + D 4He + p+
D and T are isotopes of hydrogen namely deuterium and tritium, respectively.
9. Discuss how the relative abundance of light elements in the universe is the second piece of evidence to prove that the Big Bang occurred.
Through measurements, we find that around 24% of the universe’s ordinary matter is currently comprised of helium, about 74% hydrogen, and
2% of other elements. These figures only make sense if nucleosynthesis in the Big Bang model actually occurred since no chemical process
significantly changes these percentages.
147
10. Discuss a third part of evidence for the Big Bang model: cosmic microwave background, or the energy (thermal radiation) that was left as a
result of recombination. Atoms became neutral due to the binding of nuclei and electrons. The remaining radiation then began to scatter. This
is seen by scientists as a faint microwave glow not emitted by any object in space.
11. Share with learners a video by Youtube animator Kurzgesagt. www.youtube.com/watch?v=wNDGgL73ihY. Inform learners that it can serve
as a simple summary of the lesson that they may refer to as a more detailed discussion of the BBT and other cosmological theories are
discussed later on.
PRACTICE (20 MINS)

Nucleosynthesis game
12. Emphasize nucleosynthesis by playing the following game/activity:
The objective is to go through as many nucleosynthesis reactions as possible.
Rules for each learner:
1. You must always have a particle card. If after a reaction you do not have one after a reaction, you will randomly get a neutron card (n) or
proton card (p+) before the next turn starts.
2. You must find a reaction partner after each turn based on the allowed reactions on your card. One reaction = 1 point.
3. If you are holding a neutron card (n) or proton card (p+), you may either choose to keep your card or you may swap with a partner (see
Reaction List).
4. If you are unable to find a partner to react with, you must wait until the next turn.
5. If there are two products to the reaction (ignoring γ), you must agree who gets which particle card. If there is only one product, you must
agree who gets the product card and who is left with nothing. He or she will randomly get a neutron card (n) or proton card (p+) before the
next turn starts.
6. Honesty system: keep track of your points!

Reading of a related text: The Cosmic Connection (Outside of class)
13. For an assignment and as preparation for the next lesson, have learners read Carl Sagan’s The Cosmic Connection (Annex B) and answer
the following guide questions:
148
2. Astrology and astronomy both deal with the stars and planets. List at least three differences between them.
Apply and analyze:
3. Why did human beings invent astrology? How do we know astrology is not a real study?
4. How does science say we are connected with the universe?
Evaluate:
5. Carl Sagan, the author of the essay, famously says in Paragraph 16, “We are made of star stuff.” What do you think he meant by that?
14. You may opt to have advanced or interested learners to research on the ideas of dark matter and dark energy. You may discuss these
outside of class using the Discussion Appointments technique.
Additional Exercises, Performance task to compare Steady State Theory to Big Bang model (20 minutes)
A. Additional Exercises (sample questions for Written Evaluation):
1. Arrange the stages of the Big Bang Theory: recombination, inflation, Big Bang singularity, nucleosynthesis.
2. Given the composition of each nucleus, complete the nucleosynthesis reactions below: D = 1 p+, 1 n T = 1 p+, 2 n 3He = 2 p+, 1
n 4He = 2 p+, 2 n 7Be = 4 p+, 3 n 7Li = 3 p+, 4 n 
a. p+ + n +γ c. 7Li + 2 4He e. ___ + 7Be + γ 
b. 3He + D + p+ d. + D T + p+
3. Which of these is true about the Big Bang model?

a. The singularity is an established, well-defined part of the model.
b. Cosmic expansion stopped at some point in time.
c. Part of its proof is the amounts of H and He we have in the universe today.
d. The Big Bang was a big explosion that threw matter into many different directions.
4. Using one to two sentences each, explain the three pieces of evidence presented for the Big Bang Theory:
149
a. Redshift b. Relative abundance c. Cosmic microwave background
B. Performance Task
If time and schedule permits, have groups of learners research the Steady State Theory, which is the alternate scientific cosmological theory
proposed at the time. In their output, they must:
a. Present the features of the Steady State Theory
b. Compare and contrast Steady State Theory to the Big Bang
c. Discuss the evidence that led to the Steady State Theory being discarded
Learners may present their research in the form of a poster, PowerPoint presentation, an essay, video, or infographic. A sample rubric may be
given as follows:
As an alternative to the nucleosynthesis game (in case there is not enough time), have the learners study and analyze the given reactions to
help them answer Evaluation A2.
Chief nuclear reactions responsible for the relative abundances of light atomic nuclei observed throughout the universe.
Image retrieved from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nucleosynthesis
Lineweaver, C., & Davis, T. (2005 March). Misconceptions About The Big Bang. Scientific American, 36-45.
150
Oakes, K. (2011 August 2). On the origin of chemical elements. Retrieved September 16, 2015, from http://blogs.scientificamerican.com/basic-
space/httpblogsscientificamericancombasic-space20110802on-the-origin-of-chemical-elements/
Wall, M. (2011, October 21). The Big Bang: What Really Happened at Our Universe's Birth? Retrieved September 15, 2015, from http://
www.space.com/13347-big-bang-origins-universe-birth.html
Images:
Figure 1.
History of the Universe [digital image]. (2014). Retrieved September 16, 2015 from http://bicepkeck.org/visuals.html
Figure 2.
Weiss, A. (2006). [Diagram of significant nuclear reactions]. Retrieved September 16, 2015 from http://www.einstein-online.info/en/spotlights/
BBN_phys/index.html
Video:
In a Nutshell – Kurzgesagt [kurzgesagt]. (2014 March 3). The Beginning of Everything – The Big Bang [Youtube video]. Retrieved September 16,
2015, from www.youtube.com/watch?v=wNDGgL73ihY
151
Chemical Change I
Content&Standards&
The learners demonstrate an understanding of: LESSON OUTLINE
1. How fast a reaction takes place Introduction Presentation of objectives and terms 5
2. How much energy is involved in a reaction /&Review
Performance&Standards& Motivation Group experiments/Class demonstration 45
The learners shall be able to propose ways to speed up or slow down chemical
reactions.
Instruction&/& Class discussion 80
Learning&Competencies& Delivery&/&
The learners: Practice
1. Use simple collision theory to explain the effects of concentration,
Enrichment Skit/Learner demonstration/report 30
temperature, and particle size on the rate of reaction (S11/12PS-IIIf-23)
2. Define catalyst and describe how it affects reaction rate (S11/12PS-IIIf-24)
3. Recognize that energy is released or absorbed during a chemical reaction Evaluation Written exam 20
(S11/12PS-IIIi-28)
Speci4ic&Learning&Outcomes& Materials • Laboratory supplies (refer to

At the end of the lesson, the learners shall be able to: experiments/demonstrations below)
1. Use simple collision theory to explain the effects of concentration,
temperature and particle size on the rate of reaction. Resources&
2. Define catalyst and describe how it affects reaction rate. (1) Whitten, K. W., Davis, R. E., Peck, M. L., & Stanley, G. G., (2005).
General Chemistry 7th ed. Singapore: Thomson/ Brooks/ Cole;
3. Recognize that energy is released or absorbed during a chemical reaction
(2) McMurry, J. E., Fay, R. C., (2008). Chemistry 5th ed. United
States of America: Pearson Prentice Hall.
152

Teacher&Tips:&
Communicate learning objectives and important terms
Display the objectives and terms
1. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim, prominently on one side of the classroom so
Own Words, Read-aloud): that the learners can refer to them and
review as more terms are introduced.
a. Use simple collision theory to explain the effects of concentration, temperature, and particle
size on the rate of reaction.
b. Define catalyst and describe how it affects reaction rate.
c. Recognize that energy is released or absorbed during a chemical reaction.

a. Catalyst e. Collision theory
b. Activation energy f. Effective collision
c. Exothermic reaction g. Transition state
d. Endothermic reaction h. Activated complex
Group experiments/Class demonstration
Experiment
1. Sodium Thiosulfate and Hydrochloric Acid
153
Materials:
• Erlenmeyer flasks
• Beakers Teacher&Tips:&
• graduated cylinder Variation of Experiment 1 (Effect of

concentration) can be viewed in this
• eggshell
video:
• 4% (g/mL) sodium thiosulfate (Na2S2O3) https://www.youtube.com/watch?
v=r4IZDPpN-
• 2%, 4%, 8%, 20% (v/v) hydrochloric acid (HCl) (Observe caution!)
bk&ebc=ANyPxKqpc1gUZeLbZIApkxPrUFX
• warm and cold water bath 0sCgpu2X0O6WCsiJkSr_zn_tDuC1PAkgGU
0Tj_SAcX7rP8DCGVLQblywZ7JhJoDXXU5c
• mortar and pestle
M2w (Last accessed March 22, 2016)
• Thermometer
In performing Experiment 1, guide the
• Ice
learners on how to minimize error during
• Stove/ bunsen burner/ alcohol lamp the reaction between Na2S2O3 and HCl.
The key is to be consistent with deciding

Procedure: when the reaction is finished. For the lowest
concentration, the reaction will gradually
become cloudy then opaque white and
Effect of Concentration lastly, an opaque dirty white color. You may
show one reaction to the learners as a
1. Put 20 mL of 4% Na2S2O3 in a flask. Place flask on top of a white paper with an X-mark.
guide.
2. Quickly add 5 mL of 2% HCl and stir. Look through the flask to see the X-mark. Note the time
it takes for the X-mark to disappear.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 using 5 mL of 4% HCl.
4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 using 5 mL of 8% HCl. Compare your results.
*Caution: This reaction produces sulfur dioxide (toxic gas). Ensure good ventilation during this
experiment.
Effect of Temperature
5. Warm 20 mL of 4% Na2S2O3 solution by placing it in warm water for five minutes.
6. Repeat steps 1 and 2 using warm Na2S2O3.
154
7. Cool 20 mL of 4% Na2S2O3 solution by placing it in a cold water bath for five minutes.
8. Repeat steps 1 and 2 using cold Na2S2O3.
Effect of Surface Area / Particle Size

9. Put 5 mL of 20% HCl in a beaker. Add half a tablespoon of uncrushed eggshells. Observe for
two minutes.
10. Repeat step 7 using the same amount of crushed eggshell. Compare your results.
Disposal
Dispose solutions of sodium thiosulfate and HCl down the sink with copious amount of running
water. Any excess acid should first be neutralized before disposal.
Data and Observation
HCl Time Observations
2%
4%
8%
Na2S2O3 Time Observations
Warm
cold Teacher&Tips:&
Do not use open flame near this setup as

Eggshell Time Observations the reaction produces flammable hydrogen
gas.
uncrushed
crushed
Be very careful in handling muriatic acid.
155
ALTERNATIVE Experiments
2. Aluminum Foil and Hydrochloric Acid (Effect of Concentration)
If sodium thiosulfate is not available, use aluminum foil as an alternative in doing Experiment 1
(Effect of Concentration.)
Cause uniform sizes of aluminum foil (1x1 cm) to react with varying concentrations of hydrochloric
acid. If HCl is not available, household muriatic acid can be used as a substitute. Experiment with 10
mL of 10%, 20%, and 30% muriatic acid. Time the reaction according to the rate of disappearance of
aluminum foil or according to how much aluminum foil reacted for 5 minutes.
3. Baking soda and Vinegar (Effect of Concentration)

If sodium thiosulfate is not available, use baking soda and vinegar as an alternative for Experiment 1.
Dilute vinegar in water to get three different concentrations. The ratio of water to vinegar may be 0:1
(pure vinegar), 1:1, and 2:1. Using the same procedures as experiment 1, pour the vinegar samples
into 1 tbsp. of baking soda. Note the difference in reactions.
Teacher&Tips:&
4. Glow stick and water (Effect of Temperature) The glow stick in the hot water will be the
Prepare three glow sticks. This experiment should be performed in a darkened room or set it up brightest of all three. This shows that the
reaction between the chemicals in the glow
inside a medium-sized box with only a viewing hole.
stick is happening quickly.
1. Prepare three beakers each containing:
The science of how glow sticks work can be
a. Hot water (70-80oC))
found in this website: http://
b. Room temperature water (30-35oC) www.compoundchem.com/2014/10/14/
glowsticks/ (Last accessed March 23, 2016)
c. Cold water (water with ice)
2. Simultaneously snap the glow sticks to activate and individually submerge them in the beakers.
Observe.
156
Class discussion
Gather observations from the experiments. Relate how these reactions (as well as all chemical
reactions) are theorized to be based on the collision theory of reaction rates.
Lecture proper
Teacher&Tips:&
Introduce the Collision Theory of Reaction Rates.
In gathering data from the experiment, have
Collision Theory of Reaction Rates the learners recall the procedure and set up.
Encourage learners to openly give their
This theory states that for reactions to occur, molecules, atoms, or ions must first collide. Not all observations while using proper
collisions are successful. In order for collisions to be effective collisions, particles must possess terminologies.
the minimum amount of energy needed for the reaction and must collide with proper orientation.
Take note every time they give explanations
rather than observations. Explain the
Introduce the transition state theory. difference between observation and
judgment/explanation.
Transition State Theory Learners may have working theories in their

minds when conducting experiments but it
Chemical reactions which require bond breaking and forming is accompanied by changes in is important for them to just plainly observe
potential energy. According to the theory, the reactants must pass through a high-energy, short- to fully appreciate the phenomenon.
lived intermediate state called the transition state in order for reactions to occur. The kinetic
energy of the particles must overcome the potential energy needed to break and create bonds.
The activation energy, Ea (or activation barrier) is the kinetic energy needed by reactants to
allow them to reach the transition state.
157
Sample reaction:
Teacher&Tips:&
Have group members write their

observations on manila paper and post on
the board when completed. Ask for a
member representative to report and give
possible explanations based on the
evidences. Afterwards, give your
explanations supported by the theories.
You may wait until the part of the lecture

where factors affecting reaction rates are
discussed before gathering conclusions
regarding factors affecting rates of
reactions.
Figure 1. Retrieved March 23,

2016, from http://
chemistry.tutorvista.com/
physical-chemistry/transition-
158
Have the learners observe the two energy diagrams and note their differences. Mention that in
chemical reactions, bond breaking and forming occurs. Point out the energy involved in bond
breaking and forming.
Bond breaking - energy is absorbed

Bond forming - energy is released
Guide questions: Teacher&Tips:&
1. Based on the diagram given, how does the energy of the reactants compare with the energy of
You need not discuss changes in enthalpy as
the products? it is not within the scope of the curriculum.
2. If the energy of the reactant is greater than the energy of the product, will energy be released The term enthalpy can be replaced with
or absorbed by the reaction? Why do you think so? “heat of reaction.”
3. If the condition were reversed (to that of no 2) what do you think will happen and why?
The net amount of energy in the breaking and forming of bonds determines if a reaction is
exothermic or endothermic.
Point out that the activated complex quickly occurs and is temporary when the activation energy is
reached.
Exothermic reaction
C + D → CD + energy negative heat of reaction
Energy absorbed is less than the energy released. Hence, heat of reaction is negative.
Heat of reaction = Energy of products - Energy of reactants
= lower energy of product - higher energy of reactant
This shows two ways of expressing an
= negative value of Heat of Reaction exothermic reaction involving the amount of
energy released.
C (s) + O2(g) → CO2(g) + 393.5 kJ
C (s) + O2(g) → CO2(g) ΔH = -393.5 kJ
159
Example retrieved from http://chemistry.tutorvista.com/physical-chemistry/exothermic-reaction.html
(April 17, 2016)
Endothermic reaction
A + B → AB - energy positive heat of reaction Teacher&Tips:&
Energy absorbed is more than the energy released. Hence, heat of reaction is positive.
endothermic reaction involving the amount
= higher energy of product - lower energy of reactant of energy released.
= positive value of Heat of Reaction
N2(g) + O2(g) + 180.5 kJ → 2NO(g)

N2(g) + O2(g) → 2NO(g) ΔH = +180.5 kJ
Example retrieved from http://chemistry.tutorvista.com/physical-chemistry/endothermic-

reaction.html (April 17, 2016)
In endothermic reactions, energy is absorbed overall so the reactions feel cool to the touch. On the
other hand, exothermic reactions have a net release of energy so the reactions feel warm to the
touch. Energy is always part of a chemical reaction. The activation energy state for both is still the
highest energy state in the whole reaction. The transition state is also created when the activation
energy is reached.
The heat of reaction is used in many things. Cite power production as an example. Coal is reacted
with oxygen in the process of combustion. This reaction produces a lot of heat (exothermic). The
heat turns water into steam that then powers the turbines. Baking bread is an endothermic reaction
wherein the dough absorbs heat from the environment in order to rise and cook properly. As more
substances are involved in a chemical reaction, more energy is either absorbed or released to the
environment.
160
With the two theories in mind and recalling the earlier experiments, discuss the factors affecting
reaction rates. Ensure that the learners are the ones who make the conclusions about the
experiments. Ask them how the results can be explained using the collision theory.
Factors affecting reaction rates

Concentration of reactants
From the experiment, it should have been observed that higher concentrations of HCl decreases
the time it takes for the X mark to no longer be visible. Therefore, we can conclude that this
increases the rate of reaction.
In collision theory, an increase in reactant concentration ensures that there will be more collisions Teacher&Tips:&
between particles. This also increases the probability rate of effective collisions.
Graphing activity (for advanced learners)
Learners may be asked to create:
Temperature
From the experiment, it should also have been observed that the sample using warm Na2S2O3 1. A concentration vs time graph, and a
proceeded quicker than the cold Na2S2O3. Therefore, we can conclude that increasing the 2. A concentration vs 1/time graph.
temperature of the reactants increases reaction rate. In the glow stick experiment, it was also seen
The first graph will show that concentration
that the glow stick in the warm water glows brighter than one in the cold water bath showing a is inversely proportional to time (increase
faster reaction. concentration equates to less time). The
second graph will show that concentration
In collision theory, increasing the temperature of the reactants increases the kinetic energy that it
is directly proportional to reaction time (1/
possesses, thereby increasing the number of collisions and giving enough energy to overcome the time).
activation energy.
Which will last?

Surface Area / Particle Size Ask the learners which glow stick will last
longer--is it the one in the hot water bath or
The experiment would show that more crushed eggshells reacted with HCl than the uncrushed
the one in the cold water bath? Why?
eggshells. Therefore, it can be concluded that decreasing particle size or increasing surface area
results to faster reaction rate.
In collision theory, an increase in surface area relates to more particles being available for collision.
Presence of Catalysts
161
Catalysts
Catalysts are substances that can be added to a chemical reaction to increase its reaction rate. This Teacher&Tips:&
allows the reaction to occur in an alternative pathway. This pathway requires lower activation
energy. Catalysts are not consumed in a reaction.
An increase in temperature generally
Introduce this topic by showing the graph below. Point to the two activation energies and ask the speeds up a chemical reaction, though
learners to analyze what these mean for the speed of the reaction. You can also introduce analogies. there are exceptions.
Many analogies can be made to explain

catalysts. For example, lowering the passing
score so more learners can pass an exam,
finding a shortcut to get to a place,
climbing a mountain taking a less inclined
path, etc.
A very helpful video on catalysts can be

viewed at
https://www.youtube.com/watch?
v=WCAojC4_zIY (Last accessed March 23,
2016)
Figure 2. Retrieved March 23, 2016, from http://www.bbc.co.uk/education/guides/z4cmn39/

revision/5
162
! Pt
2 CO(g) + O2(g) Pd 2 CO2(g) [reaction in catalytic converter]
The sample reaction above occurs in catalytic converters of automobiles. This reaction very quickly converts harmful and poisonous carbon
monoxide to less harmful carbon dioxide.
There is no need to discuss all the parts shown in the diagram. Only emphasize the action of the catalysts in cleaning the gas released by the
engine. The honeycomb structure increases the surface area of the catalyst making the catalytic converter more efficient.

http://mastermuffler.net/wp-content/
uploads/2014/09/tuneups_graphic.jpg
163
Other examples of catalyzed reactions are:
Reaction Catalysts Commercial process / Use
N2 + 3 H2 → 2 NH3 Fe, K2O, Al2O3 Haber process for the synthesis of ammonia.
Ammonia is used as a cleaner and as an
ingredient in the manufacture of fertilizers
and nitric acid.
CO + 2 H2 → CH3OH ZnO, Cr2O3 Industrial synthesis of methanol. Methanol is
used in the manufacture of plastics,
adhesives, gasoline additives, and industrial
solvent.
Atmospheric nitrogen → ammonia Nitrogenase, an enzyme present in bacteria The ammonia serves as fertilizers for plant
on the root nodules of legumes such as peas growth.
and beans
To end, have the learners summarize the requirements for an effective collision and the factors affecting reaction rates.
Requirements for effective collision

1. Proper orientation
2. Meet activation energy
Factors affecting reaction rate:

1. Concentration
2. Surface area
3. Temperature
4. Presence of catalyst
164
Demonstration/Report
OPTION 1
Have the learners pick any of the items below to report on. They may form pairs or groups of 3.
Catalysts
Discussions/reports on:
1. Catalytic converters - may be an interesting subject for learners, especially those interested in
cars.
Guide questions for the report:
Teacher&Tips:&
a. What is a catalytic converter?
b. How does a catalytic converter work? Helpful website on catalysts:
c. How do catalytic converters help the environment?
http://www.scienceclarified.com/everyday/
Real-Life-Chemistry-Vol-2/Catalysts-Real-
2. Biological catalysts -- Enzymes! life-applications.html (Last accessed March
24, 2016)
Guide questions::
a. What are enzymes?
b. What are the roles that enzymes play in our body?
c. Give two enzymes that you are interested in and share their properties/ roles.
*The teacher should give options of enzymes to limit the learners’ options.
3. CFCs as harmful catalysts in the degradation of our ozone layer!

a. What are CFCs? Its uses and properties?
b. What do CFCs do to our atmosphere?
c. How are CFCs managed? When/ why was it banned? What replaced its use as a refrigerant?
165
OPTION 2
To connect the concept of catalysts to society, ask the learners how they may serve as catalysts for certain causes. Knowing what a catalyst does
to a chemical reaction, the learners may apply the same principle on social issues. Work together with the English and Social Science teacher
for this project. Situations may be related to the school’s needs, the local government or the international community. Allow enough time for
the learners to work on the project. Brochures, flyers, posters, debate, etc. are possible output for this activity.
OPTION 3
Challenge the learners to look for practical applications of their knowledge on factors affecting chemical reactions. Expect answers like cutting
ingredients to small pieces to decrease cooking time, increasing temperature to cook food faster, proofing dough in a warm environment,
refrigerating food to delay spoilage, reducing rusting by painting metal to reduce surface area exposed to air, etc.
Learners may use posters, flyers, brochures to better illustrate their ideas.
Report Assessment Criteria
Scientific accuracy 50%
Organization 20%
Teamwork (cooperation among group mates, all group 10%

mates contributed)
Presentation (entertaining, shows confidence, uses 20%

appropriate verbal and body language)
166
Written exam
1. Which reaction is endothermic? Exothermic? Explain your answer.
167
2. Predict the rate of the reaction in the following. Assume that the substances below are reactants for different reactions. Indicate if the
reaction will be slower, faster, or have the same rate.
Normal condition Changed condition Factor Reaction rate
a) 20 % HCl 5 % HCl Concentration Slower
b) 276 K 315 K Temperature Faster
c) 2H2O2 → 2H2O + O2 addition of iron (III) oxide Catalyst Faster
d) A cube of sugar powdered sugar Surface area Faster
e) 5 sampalok cubes 1 sampalok cube Concentration Slower
f) 52 g of NaOH 65 g of NaOH Concentration Faster
g) 3.68 x 1025 atoms of Li 9.25 x 1023 atoms Li Concentration Slower
h) 500 K, 4.5% Barium 600K, 4.5% Barium Temperature Faster
i) 48 g powdered zinc 48 g zinc pellets Surface area Slower
j) Starch + water Starch + water + amylase Catalyst Faster
168
Chemical Change II
Content&Standards&
The learners demonstrate an understanding of how much reactants are needed LESSON OUTLINE
and how much products are formed in a reaction
Introduction Presentation of objectives and 50
Performance&Standards& /&Review terms, review of previous
The learners shall be able to effectively explain the process of calculating the knowledge
needed reactant and the amount of product in a reaction, as well as the
significance of limiting reactant and percent yield. Motivation Analogy of chemical reaction to 10
cooking
The learners: Instruction&/& Class discussion/problem-solving 460
1. Calculate the amount of substances used or produced in a chemical Delivery&/&
reaction (S11/12PS-IIIf-h25) Practice
2. Calculate the percent yield of a reaction (S11/12PS-IIIh-26) Enrichment Connection to carbon emission 30
3. Determine the limiting reactant in a reaction and calculate the amount of
Evaluation Written exam, worksheets 50
product formed (S11/12PS-IIIh-27)
Materials • Calculator and Periodic Table
At the end of the lesson, the learners shall be able to: • Laboratory supplies (refer to
1. Calculate the amount of substances used and produced in a chemical experiments/demonstrations below)
reaction Resources&
2. Calculate the percent yield of a reaction (1) Whitten, K. W., Davis, R. E., Peck, M. L., & Stanley, G. G., (2005).
General Chemistry 7th ed. Singapore: Thomson/ Brooks/ Cole;
3. Determine the limiting reactant in a reaction and calculate the amount of
product formed
169
Presentation of objectives and terms, review of previous lessons

Teacher&Tips:&
1. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim, that the learners can refer to them and
Own Words, Read-aloud):
a. Calculate the amount of substances used and produced in a chemical reaction
b. Calculate the percent yield of a reaction
c. Determine the limiting reactant in a reaction and calculate the amount of product formed
a. Mole e. Excess reagent
b. Percent yield f. Theoretical yield
c. Stoichiometry g. Actual yield
d. Limiting reagent h. Percent yield
Review previous lessons on:

a. Balancing chemical reactions One session dedicated to reviewing
calculation will help to support the next
b. Dimensional analysis
lesson.
c. Stoichiometric calculation, namely:
- mole concept
- calculating molar mass
- mass to mole conversion
- mole to mass conversion
170
Sample worksheets
Balancing Chemical Equations: Retrieved from http://misterguch.brinkster.net/ Teacher&Tips:&

WKS001_019_348432.pdf (Last accessed March 23, 2016) Variation of Experiment 1 (Effect of
concentration) can be viewed in this
video:
Mole to mass conversion, mass to mole conversion, and molar mass calculation worksheet: https://www.youtube.com/watch?
Retrieved from http://www.nclark.net/MolarCalculationWorksheet.pdf) (Last accessed March 23, v=r4IZDPpN-
2016) bk&ebc=ANyPxKqpc1gUZeLbZIApkxPrUFX
0sCgpu2X0O6WCsiJkSr_zn_tDuC1PAkgGU
0Tj_SAcX7rP8DCGVLQblywZ7JhJoDXXU5c
*Item 1 has an incorrect answer. Answer should be 2.16 mole. M2w (Last accessed March 22, 2016)
In performing Experiment 1, guide the

learners on how to minimize error during
the reaction between Na2S2O3 and HCl.
The key is to be consistent with deciding
Ask the learners to imagine cooking spaghetti with tomato sauce for four people. when the reaction is finished. For the lowest
concentration, the reaction will gradually
Have them determine the ingredients necessary to prepare the meal. List down the ingredients on become cloudy then opaque white and
the board while intentionally exaggerating the amount of one ingredient in proportion to other lastly, an opaque dirty white color. You may
ingredients. show one reaction to the learners as a
guide.
Let the learners react to the wrong amount to make them aware of the importance of proper ratios
in cooking. Relate how this same principle also applies to chemical reactions wherein the proper
amount of each reactant is needed to create the right amount of products.
171
Teacher&Tips:&

Create a running list - write things to
Mention that solving this question involves learning about reaction stoichiometry. Reaction
remember on the board as you mention
stoichiometry is about the relationship of the different reactants and products in a chemical reaction. them throughout the entire topic. Make
Show the chemical equation of the reaction between CO and O2. Ask the learners if the equation is sure that the chemical equation is balanced.
balanced.
CO + O2 → CO2
The stoichiometric relationships can also be
extended to volume and particle count.
Since the equation is not yet balanced, have the learners balance the equation.
2 CO + O2 → 2 CO2
Emphasize that in solving such problems, it is important that the chemical equation is balanced to
serve as their guide.
Ask the learners to draw out the relationship/ratios of reactants to products, reactant to reactant, and
product to product.
Write these relationships in fraction form to
help learners during calculation
Mole relationships/ratios
e.g.
2 mole CO : 1 mole O2
2 mole CO
2 mole CO : 2 mole CO2
1 mole O2
1 mole O2 : 2 mole CO2
Mass relationships/ratios
Help learners analyze which variable to
Molar mass of CO: 28 g/ mol
write as numerator and as denominator. The
Molar mass of O2: 32 g/ mol rule of thumb is:
Molar mass of CO2: 44 g/ mol
desired variable
given variable
*values rounded off for simplicity
172
56 g CO : 32 g O2
56 g CO : 88 g CO2 Teacher&Tips:&
32 g O2 : 88 g CO2
Mass to mole relationships/ratios
56 g CO : 1 mole O2
56 g CO : 2 mole CO2
32 g O2 : 2 mole CO2
2 mole CO : 88 g CO2
1 mole O2 : 88 g CO2
Give more complicated chemical equations and have the learners balance the equations and draw
out the different relationships/ratios.
e.g. N2(g) + 3 H2(g) → 2 NH3(g)
C2H5OH(s) + 3 O2(g) → 2 CO2(g) + 3 H2O(l)
3 Mg + Fe2O3 → 2 Fe + 3 MgO
Once the learners are comfortable with finding relationships/ratios, the teacher may introduce
varying problem-solving questions.
1. Sodium Thiosulfate and Hydrochloric Acid
Materials:
• Erlenmeyer flasks
• Beakers
• graduated cylinder
• eggshell
173
• 4% (g/mL) sodium thiosulfate (Na2S2O3)
• 2%, 4%, 8%, 20% (v/v) hydrochloric acid (HCl) (Observe caution!)
• warm and cold water bath
• mortar and pestle
• Thermometer
• Ice
• Stove/ bunsen burner/ alcohol lamp
Teacher&Tips:&
Procedure:
In gathering data from the experiment, have
the learners recall the procedure and set up.
Effect of Concentration Encourage learners to openly give their
1. Put 20 mL of 4% Na2S2O3 in a flask. Place flask on top of a white paper with an X-mark. observations while using proper
terminologies.
2. Quickly add 5 mL of 2% HCl and stir. Look through the flask to see the X-mark. Note the time it
takes for the X-mark to disappear. Take note every time they give explanations
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 using 5 mL of 4% HCl. rather than observations. Explain the
difference between observation and
4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 using 5 mL of 8% HCl. Compare your results. judgment/explanation.
Learners may have working theories in their

*Caution: This reaction produces sulfur dioxide (toxic gas). Ensure good ventilation during this minds when conducting experiments but it
experiment. is important for them to just plainly observe
to fully appreciate the phenomenon.
Effect of Temperature
5. Warm 20 mL of 4% Na2S2O3 solution by placing it in warm water for five minutes.
6. Repeat steps 1 and 2 using warm Na2S2O3.
7. Cool 20 mL of 4% Na2S2O3 solution by placing it in a cold water bath for five minutes.
8. Repeat steps 1 and 2 using cold Na2S2O3.
Effect of Surface Area / Particle Size

9. Put 5 mL of 20% HCl in a beaker. Add half a tablespoon of uncrushed eggshells. Observe for
174
two minutes.
Teacher&Tips:&
Have group members write their

observations on manila paper and post on
the board when completed. Ask for a
member representative to report and give
possible explanations based on the
evidences. Afterwards, give your
explanations supported by the theories.
You may wait until the part of the lecture

where factors affecting reaction rates are
discussed before gathering conclusions
regarding factors affecting rates of
reactions.
Figure 1. Retrieved March 23,

2016, from http://
chemistry.tutorvista.com/
physical-chemistry/transition-
175
10. Repeat step 7 using the same amount of crushed eggshell. Compare your results.
Disposal
Dispose solutions of sodium thiosulfate and HCl down the sink with copious amount of running
water. Any excess acid should first be neutralized before disposal.
Data and Observation

Teacher&Tips:&
You need not discuss changes in enthalpy as

it is not within the scope of the curriculum.
The term enthalpy can be replaced with
ALTERNATIVE Experiments
“heat of reaction.”
2. Aluminum Foil and Hydrochloric Acid (Effect of Concentration)
If sodium thiosulfate is not available, use aluminum foil as an alternative in doing Experiment 1
(Effect of Concentration.)
Cause uniform sizes of aluminum foil (1x1 cm) to react with varying concentrations of hydrochloric
acid. If HCl is not available, household muriatic acid can be used as a substitute. Experiment with 10
mL of 10%, 20%, and 30% muriatic acid. Time the reaction according to the rate of disappearance of
aluminum foil or according to how much aluminum foil reacted for 5 minutes.
3. Baking soda and Vinegar (Effect of Concentration)

If sodium thiosulfate is not available, use baking soda and vinegar as an alternative for Experiment 1.

Dilute vinegar in water to get three different concentrations. The ratio of water to vinegar may be 0:1 exothermic reaction involving the amount of
(pure vinegar), 1:1, and 2:1. Using the same procedures as experiment 1, pour the vinegar samples energy released.
into 1 tbsp. of baking soda. Note the difference in reactions.
176
4. Glow stick and water (Effect of Temperature)
Prepare three glow sticks. This experiment should be performed in a darkened room or set it up
inside a medium-sized box with only a viewing hole.
1. Prepare three beakers each containing:
a. Hot water (70-80oC))
Teacher&Tips:&
b. Room temperature water (30-35oC)
c. Cold water (water with ice) This shows two ways of expressing an
endothermic reaction involving the amount
2. Simultaneously snap the glow sticks to activate and individually submerge them in the beakers.
of energy released.
Observe.
Class discussion
Gather observations from the experiments. Relate how these reactions (as well as all chemical
reactions) are theorized to be based on the collision theory of reaction rates.
Lecture proper
Introduce the Collision Theory of Reaction Rates.
Collision Theory of Reaction Rates

This theory states that for reactions to occur, molecules, atoms, or ions must first collide. Not all
collisions are successful. In order for collisions to be effective collisions, particles must possess
the minimum amount of energy needed for the reaction and must collide with proper orientation.
Introduce the transition state theory.
Transition State Theory

Chemical reactions which require bond breaking and forming is accompanied by changes in
177
potential energy. According to the theory, the reactants must pass through a high-energy, short-
lived intermediate state called the transition state in order for reactions to occur. The kinetic
energy of the particles must overcome the potential energy needed to break and create bonds.
The activation energy, Ea (or activation barrier) is the kinetic energy needed by reactants to
allow them to reach the transition state.
Teacher&Tips:&
Sample reaction:
Have the learners observe the two energy diagrams and note their differences. Mention that in Graphing activity (for advanced learners)
Learners may be asked to create:
chemical reactions, bond breaking and forming occurs. Point out the energy involved in bond
breaking and forming. 1. A concentration vs time graph, and a
2. A concentration vs 1/time graph.
Bond breaking - energy is absorbed The first graph will show that concentration
Bond forming - energy is released is inversely proportional to time (increase
concentration equates to less time). The
second graph will show that concentration
Guide questions: is directly proportional to reaction time (1/
time).
1. Based on the diagram given, how does the energy of the reactants compare with the energy of
the products?
Which will last?
2. If the energy of the reactant is greater than the energy of the product, will energy be released Ask the learners which glow stick will last
or absorbed by the reaction? Why do you think so? longer--is it the one in the hot water bath or
3. If the condition were reversed (to that of no 2) what do you think will happen and why? the one in the cold water bath? Why?
The net amount of energy in the breaking and forming of bonds determines if a reaction is
exothermic or endothermic.
Point out that the activated complex quickly occurs and is temporary when the activation energy is
reached.
178
Exothermic reaction Teacher&Tips:&
C + D → CD + energy negative heat of reaction
Energy absorbed is less than the energy released. Hence, heat of reaction is negative. An increase in temperature generally
speeds up a chemical reaction, though
Heat of reaction = Energy of products - Energy of reactants there are exceptions.
= lower energy of product - higher energy of reactant
Many analogies can be made to explain
catalysts. For example, lowering the passing
score so more learners can pass an exam,
finding a shortcut to get to a place,
climbing a mountain taking a less inclined
path, etc.
A very helpful video on catalysts can be

viewed at
https://www.youtube.com/watch?
v=WCAojC4_zIY (Last accessed March 23,
2016)
= negative value of Heat of Reaction

C (s) + O2(g) → CO2(g) + 393.5 kJ
C (s) + O2(g) → CO2(g) ΔH = -393.5 kJ
Example retrieved from http://chemistry.tutorvista.com/physical-chemistry/exothermic-reaction.html

(April 17, 2016)
179
! Pt
Pd
Endothermic reaction
A + B → AB - energy positive heat of reaction
Energy absorbed is more than the energy released. Hence, heat of reaction is positive.
= higher energy of product - lower energy of reactant
= positive value of Heat of Reaction
180
N2(g) + O2(g) + 180.5 kJ → 2NO(g)
N2(g) + O2(g) → 2NO(g) ΔH = +180.5 kJ
Example retrieved from http://chemistry.tutorvista.com/physical-chemistry/endothermic-reaction.html (April 17, 2016)
In endothermic reactions, energy is absorbed overall so the reactions feel cool to the touch. On the other hand, exothermic reactions have a
net release of energy so the reactions feel warm to the touch. Energy is always part of a chemical reaction. The activation energy state for both
is still the highest energy state in the whole reaction. The transition state is also created when the activation energy is reached.
The heat of reaction is used in many things. Cite power production as an example. Coal is reacted with oxygen in the process of combustion.
This reaction produces a lot of heat (exothermic). The heat turns water into steam that then powers the turbines. Baking bread is an
endothermic reaction wherein the dough absorbs heat from the environment in order to rise and cook properly. As more substances are
involved in a chemical reaction, more energy is either absorbed or released to the environment.
With the two theories in mind and recalling the earlier experiments, discuss the factors affecting reaction rates. Ensure that the learners are the
ones who make the conclusions about the experiments. Ask them how the results can be explained using the collision theory.
Factors affecting reaction rates

Concentration of reactants
From the experiment, it should have been observed that higher concentrations of HCl decreases the time it takes for the X mark to no longer
be visible. Therefore, we can conclude that this increases the rate of reaction.
In collision theory, an increase in reactant concentration ensures that there will be more collisions between particles. This also increases the
probability rate of effective collisions.
Temperature
From the experiment, it should also have been observed that the sample using warm Na2S2O3 proceeded quicker than the cold Na2S2O3.
Therefore, we can conclude that increasing the temperature of the reactants increases reaction rate. In the glow stick experiment, it was also
seen that the glow stick in the warm water glows brighter than one in the cold water bath showing a faster reaction.
In collision theory, increasing the temperature of the reactants increases the kinetic energy that it possesses, thereby increasing the number
of collisions and giving enough energy to overcome the activation energy.
181
Surface Area / Particle Size
The experiment would show that more crushed eggshells reacted with HCl than the uncrushed
eggshells. Therefore, it can be concluded that decreasing particle size or increasing surface area
results to faster reaction rate.
In collision theory, an increase in surface area relates to more particles being available for
collision.
Presence of Catalysts
Catalysts
Catalysts are substances that can be added to a chemical reaction to increase its reaction rate. This
allows the reaction to occur in an alternative pathway. This pathway requires lower activation Teacher&Tips:&
energy. Catalysts are not consumed in a reaction.
Introduce this topic by showing the graph below. Point to the two activation energies and ask the Helpful website on catalysts:
learners to analyze what these mean for the speed of the reaction. You can also introduce analogies.
http://www.scienceclarified.com/everyday/
Real-Life-Chemistry-Vol-2/Catalysts-Real-
life-applications.html (Last accessed March
24, 2016)
Figure 2. Retrieved March 23, 2016, from http://www.bbc.co.uk/education/guides/z4cmn39/
revision/5
2 CO(g) + O2(g) 2 CO2(g) [reaction in catalytic converter]
The sample reaction above occurs in catalytic converters of automobiles. This reaction very quickly
converts harmful and poisonous carbon monoxide to less harmful carbon dioxide.
182
There is no need to discuss all the parts shown in the diagram. Only emphasize the action of the catalysts in cleaning the gas released by the
engine. The honeycomb structure increases the surface area of the catalyst making the catalytic converter more efficient.
Other examples of catalyzed reactions are:
Reaction Catalysts Commercial process / Use
N2 + 3 H2 → 2 NH3 Fe, K2O, Al2O3 Haber process for the synthesis of ammonia.
Ammonia is used as a cleaner and as an
ingredient in the manufacture of fertilizers
and nitric acid.
CO + 2 H2 → CH3OH ZnO, Cr2O3 Industrial synthesis of methanol. Methanol is
used in the manufacture of plastics,
adhesives, gasoline additives, and industrial
solvent.
Atmospheric nitrogen → ammonia Nitrogenase, an enzyme present in bacteria The ammonia serves as fertilizers for plant
on the root nodules of legumes such as peas growth.
and beans
To end, have the learners summarize the requirements for an effective collision and the factors
affecting reaction rates.
http://mastermuffler.net/wp-content/
Requirements for effective collision uploads/2014/09/tuneups_graphic.jpg
1. Proper orientation
2. Meet activation energy
Factors affecting reaction rate:

1. Concentration
2. Surface area
3. Temperature
4. Presence of catalyst
183
Demonstration/Report
OPTION 1
Have the learners pick any of the items below to report on. They may form pairs or groups of 3.
Catalysts
Discussions/reports on:
184
1. Catalytic converters - may be an interesting subject for learners, especially those interested in cars.
Guide questions for the report:
a. What is a catalytic converter?
b. How does a catalytic converter work?
c. How do catalytic converters help the environment?
2. Biological catalysts -- Enzymes!

Guide questions::
a. What are enzymes?
b. What are the roles that enzymes play in our body?
c. Give two enzymes that you are interested in and share their properties/ roles.
*The teacher should give options of enzymes to limit the learners’ options.
3. CFCs as harmful catalysts in the degradation of our ozone layer!

a. What are CFCs? Its uses and properties?
b. What do CFCs do to our atmosphere?
c. How are CFCs managed? When/ why was it banned? What replaced its use as a refrigerant?
OPTION 2
To connect the concept of catalysts to society, ask the learners how they may serve as catalysts for certain causes. Knowing what a catalyst does
to a chemical reaction, the learners may apply the same principle on social issues. Work together with the English and Social Science teacher
for this project. Situations may be related to the school’s needs, the local government or the international community. Allow enough time for
the learners to work on the project. Brochures, flyers, posters, debate, etc. are possible output for this activity.
OPTION 3
Challenge the learners to look for practical applications of their knowledge on factors affecting chemical reactions. Expect answers like cutting
ingredients to small pieces to decrease cooking time, increasing temperature to cook food faster, proofing dough in a warm environment,
refrigerating food to delay spoilage, reducing rusting by painting metal to reduce surface area exposed to air, etc.
185
Learners may use posters, flyers, brochures to better illustrate their ideas.
Report Assessment Criteria
Scientific accuracy 50%
Organization 20%
Teamwork (cooperation among group mates, all group 10%

mates contributed)
Presentation (entertaining, shows confidence, uses 20%

appropriate verbal and body language)
Written exam
1. Which reaction is endothermic? Exothermic? Explain your answer.
186
2. Predict the rate of the reaction in the following. Assume that the substances below are reactants for different reactions. Indicate if the
reaction will be slower, faster, or have the same rate.
Normal condition Changed condition Factor Reaction rate
a) 20 % HCl 5 % HCl Concentration Slower
b) 276 K 315 K Temperature Faster
c) 2H2O2 → 2H2O + O2 addition of iron (III) oxide Catalyst Faster
d) A cube of sugar powdered sugar Surface area Faster
e) 5 sampalok cubes 1 sampalok cube Concentration Slower
f) 52 g of NaOH 65 g of NaOH Concentration Faster
g) 3.68 x 1025 atoms of Li 9.25 x 1023 atoms Li Concentration Slower
h) 500 K, 4.5% Barium 600K, 4.5% Barium Temperature Faster
i) 48 g powdered zinc 48 g zinc pellets Surface area Slower
j) Starch + water Starch + water + amylase Catalyst Faster
187
How Energy is Produced and Managed

Content&Standards&
The learners demonstrate an understanding of how energy is harnessed from LESSON OUTLINE
different sources.
The learners shall be able to illustrate how energy is produced and managed
Motivation Short discussion of what learners know 5
from different sources.
about electricity
The learners describe how energy is produced and managed from different Instruction&/& Class discussion and reporting 90
sources: (S11/12PS-IIIi-29) Delivery&/&
Practice
a. Fossil fuels e. Hydroelectric
b. Biogas f. Electrochemical (batteries) Enrichment Group discussion and creation of 10
c. Geothermal g. Solar cells checklists on how to conserve electricity
d. Hydrothermal h. Biomass
Evaluation Written assessment 10
Materials • Diagram of basic power plant
• LED, coil of wire strong magnet
a. Describe the different sources of energy
b. Give a brief summary of how energy is produced from different sources Resources&
(1) The American Geological Institute. (2014). Environmental
c. Differentiate between renewable and non-renewable sources of energy Science, 2nd ed. Pasig City, Philippines: Cengage Learning Asia
d. Outline the pros and cons of the different sources of energy Pte Ltd.;
Overview of the objectives and terms

188
1. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim, Teacher&Tips:&
a. We will describe the different sources of energy
b. We will learn how energy is harnessed review as more terms are introduced.
c. We will differentiate between renewable and non-renewable sources of energy
d. We will identify the pros and cons of each energy source
2. Introduce the list of important terms:

a. Renewable energy
b. Non-renewable energy
c. Biomass
d. Fossil fuel
In the demonstration of the production of

3. Have the learners recall how electricity is generated via electromagnetism (taken in Grade 9 electricity via changing magnetic flux, point
Science). Emphasize how a changing magnetic flux is able to create electricity. Demonstrate the out that motion is necessary in order for
electricity to be produced. The LED will not
concept using a thick coil of wire, LED, and a strong magnet. Relate how this process is replicated
light up if the magnet is merely placed
on a much bigger scale in power plants. inside the coil. This is so the learners will
understand why turbines have to be turned
continuously via different means (steam
power, hydroelectric, etc.) in order for
MOTIVATION (5 MINS) electricity to be produced.
Short discussion of what learners know about electricity
Ask the learners if they ever wondered where the electricity in their power outlet comes from. How
is electricity generated? What is the main source of electricity in the Philippines? Why are we asked
to always conserve electricity? Will electricity run out or is it from a perpetual source?
Ask learners to name different sources of energy and list them on the board. Add on the list
sources that are not mentioned by the learners.
189
Introduction (10 minutes) Teacher&Tips:&
For specific locations of different power

plants and how much electricity is produced
Present a diagram showing the different sources of energy in the Philippines and the percentages
from each, the following sources are useful.
of each source. This is to give the learners an overview of the energy situation in our country. Allow
the learners to compare the main source of energy from the different regions of the Philippines. Luzon
(Retrieved February 18, 2016, http://
www.doe.gov.ph/doe_files/pdf/
01_Energy_Situationer/
2015_existing_power_plants_luzon_june_30
.pdf ).
Visayas
(Retrieved February 18, 2016, from http://
2015_existing_power_plants_visayas_june_3
0.pdf
Mindanao
2015_existing_power_plants_mindanao_jun
e_30.pdf ).
Philippines (overall)
2015_existing_power_plants_summary_june
_30.pdf ).
Figure 1. Gross Power Generation by Fuel (2013), Retrieved February 17, 2016, http://
www.eia.gov/todayinenergy/images/2015.03.06/chart2.png).
190
Help the learners realize how modern society has become dependent on electricity. From the moment we wake up, when we eat, travel,
communicate, relax, work and play, we use electricity. Our country produces millions of megawatts of electricity yet it is still not enough. Some
areas in our country still do not have electricity. Learning about the science behind power production should make us better consumers.
Introduce that electricity can be broken down to two major groups: renewable and non-renewable sources.
Non-renewable sources are: Renewable sources are:
- Fossil fuel (coal, petroleum, - Hydroelectric

natural gas) - Wind power
- Electrochemical (batteries) - Solar power
- Geothermal
- Hydrothermal
- Biomass
Present the four major steps in the conversion of energy to electricity:

1. Energy from bond breaking and formation in fuels is converted to heat energy. This step is not necessary if power generation that does
not require burning of fuels. E.g. Geothermal and hydrothermal plants
2. Heat energy is used to convert water to steam which has kinetic energy
3. Steam’s kinetic energy becomes mechanical energy that makes turbines turn
4. Mechanical energy from the turbines create electricity via electromagnetism
Split the class into seven (7) groups and assign one source of energy for each group to research and report on. You may either provide them the
printouts of the resources below or have them research from the library. Guide questions are written below.
Give the learners time for independent research/ reading and collaboration in the classroom (45 minutes).
Allow 4 to 5 minutes for each group to report. Clarify, elaborate, and correct concepts. 
191
Guide Questions:
Fossil fuel Hydroelectric

- What are fossil fuels? What are the different examples of fossil - How is hydroelectric energy harnessed?
fuels? - What are the advantages and disadvantages of using
- In brief, how are fossil fuels formed? hydroelectric energy? You may answer in terms of efficiency of
- What are the advantages and disadvantages of using fossil use, availability, hazards, environmental effect, price, etc.
fuel? You may answer in terms of efficiency of use, availability,
hazards, environmental effect, price, etc. Wind
- How is wind energy harnessed?
Electrochemical Cells - What are the advantages and disadvantages of using wind
- What are electrochemical energy sources? energy? You may answer in terms of efficiency of use, availability,
- How is electrochemical energy produced? hazards, environmental effect, price, etc.
- What is a primary cell?
- What is a secondary cell? Solar Cells
- What are the different examples of a primary and a secondary - How is solar energy harnessed from the sun? You may answer in
cell? terms of what happens to the solar panel material when exposed
to sunlight.
- What are the advantages and disadvantages of using
electrochemical cells? You may answer in terms of efficiency of - What are the advantages and disadvantages of using solar
use, availability, hazards, environmental effect, price, etc. energy? You may answer in terms of efficiency of use, availability,
hazards, environmental effect, price, etc.
Geothermal
Biomass
- What is the source of geothermal energy?
- What is biomass? What are examples of biomass?
- How is geothermal energy harnessed from the earth?
- How is biomass used as an energy source?
- What are the advantages and disadvantages of using
geothermal energy? You may answer in terms of efficiency of use, - What are the advantages and disadvantages of using biomass?
availability, hazards, environmental effect, price, etc. You may answer in terms of efficiency of use, availability, hazards,
environmental effect, price, etc.
192
Below is an overview of the different sources of energy and resources that can be printed and shared
with the class.
Non-renewable sources
Fossil fuels include hydrocarbons such as coal, oil, and natural gas that comes from organic remains
of prehistoric organisms. Coal is the world’s most abundant fossil fuel. It is relatively inexpensive and
is readily available.
The energy that comes from fossil fuels came from the sun through the process of photosynthesis
when the prehistoric plants were still alive. Fossil fuels are captured sunlight! The formation of fossil
fuels is due to a series of geologic processes where the remains of organic life are accumulated in
the ocean bottom and are buried to eventually become part of the geosphere. They are buried to
depths having high temperature and pressure where they are converted to oil, natural gas, or coal.
In the Philippines, around 69% of our electricity is derived from fossil fuels (coal, oil, natural gas,
biomass). In the world, around 75% of our energy is generated by combustion of fossil fuels. Power
plants burn fossil fuels and the heat generated during this process is used to turn water into steam
and this turns the turbines.
The general reaction for the combustion of hydrocarbon is: Teacher&Tips:&
Hydrocarbon + Oxygen → Carbon dioxide + Water Biography of Alessandro Volta. (Retrieved

February 18, 2016, from http://
www.famousscientists.org/alessandro-
Combustion is an exothermic process. Methane is a common natural gas, an example of the volta/ ).
combustion of methane gas can be seen below.
www.britannica.com/biography/Alessandro-
CH4 + 2O2 → CO2 + 2H2O + Energy Volta).
As seen from the chemical reaction, burning fossil fuels produces carbon dioxide which is harmful to
193
our environment in huge amounts. This is one of the biggest downside of using fossil fuels. The
emissions from fossil fuel power plants also cause acid rain and global-scale pollution by elements
such as mercury.
Fossil fuel is not a sustainable energy source.
Helpful sites: Teacher&Tips:&
Helpful sites:
Fossil Fuels https://www.learnerenergy.org/topics/fossil-fuels (last accessed, May 11, 2016)
Chapter 8: Fossil Fuels - Coal, Oil, and Natural Gas http://www.energyquest.ca.gov/story/ Classification of Cells or Batteries
http://depts.washington.edu/matseed/
chapter08.html (last accessed, May 11, 2016)
batteries/MSE/classification.html (last
accessed, May 11, 2016)
Electrochemical (batteries)
Batteries give electricity via an electrochemical reaction. It has three main parts: Types of Batteries and their Applications
http://www.brighthubengineering.com/
1) Anode
power-generation-distribution/123909-
2) Cathode types-of-batteries-and-their-applications/
(last accessed, May 11, 2016)
3) Electrolyte
The first battery was invented by Alessandro Volta, an Italian physicist. He presented his paper
before the Royal Society in London in 1800. His invention of the battery propelled studies on
electricity as it allowed scientists to produce electricity.
Batteries, compared to other sources, have low intensity but they are commonly used since they are
portable and efficient. The two main types of battery:
1) primary or disposable battery
2) secondary or rechargeable battery
Examples of primary batteries are alkaline, mercury, silver-oxide, and zinc carbon batteries. Examples
of secondary batteries are lead-acid and lithium batteries.
194
Renewable sources Teacher&Tips:&
Helpful sites:
Geothermal Chapter 11: Geothermal Energy

Geothermal power is the main source of energy in the Visayas region. Around 38% of electricity in http://www.energyquest.ca.gov/story/
chapter11.html (last accessed, May 11,
Visayas is produced from geothermal power.
2016)
Geothermal Energy: Tapping the Earth’s

Geothermal power utilizes the heat energy from the earth’s crust. This heat energy heats up rocks
Heat
which, in turn, heats up nearby groundwater. In some cases, the groundwater becomes so hot that it http://
turns into underground steam. The steam is tapped to drive turbines that generate electricity. environment.nationalgeographic.com/
environment/global-warming/geothermal-
profile/ (last accessed, May 11, 2016)
Geothermal energy is less of an environmental hazard compared to fossil fuels though it still has
some emissions of carbon dioxide, nitrous oxide, and sulfur dioxide. Disposal of water is also a Geothermal
http://www.doe.gov.ph/renewable-energy-
concern as it contains some salt.
res/geothermal (last accessed, May 11,
2016)
Hydroelectric power water use

http://water.usgs.gov/edu/
wuhy.html (last accessed May 11,
Hydroelectric
2016)
Hydroelectric utilizes moving water to turn turbines. This is the main source of electricity in
Hydropower http://www.eia.gov/
Mindanao, generating around 45% of electricity in the region.
kids/energy.cfm?
page=hydropower_home-
Dams are installed in strategic locations where there is a substantial drop in elevation. basics#hydropower_environment-
One of the environmental concerns related to hydroelectric power is displacement of marine basics (last accessed, May 11, 2016)
species.
195
Wind power Teacher&Tips:&
Wind has been used in centuries to move ships and pump water. Wind turbines are installed in Helpful sites:
strategic locations to harness the mechanical energy from wind. Chapter 16: Wind Energy
http://www.energyquest.ca.gov/story/
Main examples of wind turbines in the Philippines are the ones found in San Lorenzo, Guimaras 2016)
(Trans Asia Renewable Energy Corp--TAREC); Bangui Bay, Ilocos Norte (North Wind Power Devt
Corp); Burgos, Ilocos Norte (EDC Wind Power Corporation). Wind
http://needtoknow.nas.edu/energy/energy-
sources/renewable-sources/wind/ (last
Solar Cells accessed, May 11, 2016)
We will have access to solar power as long as the sun exists. Wind
http://www.eia.gov/kids/energy.cfm?
page=wind_home-basics (last accessed,
Solar panels are composed of photovoltaic cells or cells that convert light to electricity. Panels are May 11, 2016)
comprised of two semi-conducting metals, usually silicon, layered to create a sandwich. Each sheet is
doped so that they can acquire a charge--one positive and one negative. When light shines on the
panels, electrons are made to jump out of the free atom, thereby creating electricity. Solar
http://needtoknow.nas.edu/energy/energy-
sources/renewable-sources/solar/ (last
Solar energy is abundant, requires low maintenance, and is environmentally-friendly. Emissions accessed May 11, 2016)
associated with the manufacture of solar panels are present but very minimal compared to pollution Chapter 15: Solar Energy
caused by burning fossil fuels. Two of the harmful emissions from the manufacture of solar panels are http://www.energyquest.ca.gov/story/
nitrogen trifluoride and sulfur hexafluoride. Both are potent greenhouse gases. chapter15.html (last accessed May 11, 2016)
*focus on on Photovoltaic cells as this
website also includes Solar Hot Water and
Solar energy is also known as “The People’s Power,” referring to the easy deployment of solar panels Solar Thermal Electricity
and the introduction of “community solar gardens” where energy is shared among owners. Solar Basics http://www.eia.gov/kids/
energy.cfm?page=solar_home-basics (last
accessed May 11, 2016) *focus on
Some disadvantages of solar energy are that it is expensive, requires rare metals and requires a Photovoltaic cells as this website also
includes Solar Thermal Electricity, there is
good amount of space. Thankfully, the technology is continuously improving. also a more technical description of solar
panels which may be too much for the
learners. It is up to the teacher to cut the
text taken from this site.
196
Teacher&Tips:&
Biomass
Biomass refers to organic matter from plants and animals (microorganisms). Plants get their energy
Helpful sites:
from the sun through the process of photosynthesis which, in turn, gives energy to animals upon
consumption. Wastes such as crop remains, manure and garbage are good sources of biomass. Chapter 10: Biomass Energy
Wood is also a biomass fuel. As long as we replenish the trees that we cut, biomass can be a http://www.energyquest.ca.gov/story/
sustainable energy source.
2016)
Biomass http://needtoknow.nas.edu/
Biomass is used to create methane and alcohol which are fuels useful in energy production and in
energy/energy-sources/renewable-sources/
powering automobiles. biomass/ (last accessed May 11, 2016)
Biomass Basics http://www.eia.gov/kids/
energy.cfm?page=biomass_home-basics
Production of biogas or biofuels involves the action of microorganisms that break down organic (last accessed May 11, 2016) *this site is
matter in a multi-step process. very comprehensive but is too long for
learners reading. Choose the short
descriptions of the different kinds of
Technologies utilizing biomass are continuously evolving in order to improve efficiency. biomass as learner reading.
Group discussion and creation of checklists on how to conserve electricity.
Assign the learners to bring their electric bills to class as a prerequisite to this exercise. The electric
bills will serve to make the learners aware of how much energy their own household utilizes. Divide
the class into five groups. Ask them to come up with concrete steps that they can take in order to
help conserve electricity on a daily basis. On a manila paper, have the learners create a checklist of
things that they will do to conserve electricity. Provide different settings such as what to do in school,
at home, in the car, etc.
Have the groups post the lists around the classroom for the class to read.
197
Written assessment
1. Enumerate renewable and non-renewable sources of energy.

2. Give two advantages and disadvantages of one source of electricity of your choice. Briefly explain your answers.
198
Household Chemicals and Personal

Care Products LESSON OUTLINE
Content&Standards&
The learners demonstrate an understanding of the properties and mode of action of Introduction Presentation of objectives and terms 5
the following consumer products: /&Review
1. Cleaning materials 2. Cosmetics. Motivation Products in My World Activity 40
Performance&Standards& (includes giving homework and product
The learners shall be able to make either a poster, a flyer, or a brochure of a product exploration)
indicating its uses, properties, mode of action and precautions.
Instruction&/& Class discussion / Independent 180
Learning&Competencies& Delivery&/& research / Sharing
The learners:
Practice
1. Give common examples of cleaning materials for the house and for personal care (S11/12PS-
IIIi-j-30) Enrichment Healthy Options Activity 75
2. From product labels, identify the active ingredient(s) of cleaning products used at home
(S11/12PS-IIIi-j-31) Evaluation Fact sheet written in a Manila paper,
3. Give the use of other ingredients in cleaning agents (S11/12PS-IIIi-j-32) Classroom Demonstration
4. Give common examples of personal care products used to enhance the appearance of the
human body (S11/12PS-IIIi-j-33) Materials In school computer and internet access
5. Identify the major ingredients of cosmetics such as body lotion, skin whitener, deodorants, for the learners. Should internet access
and perfume (S11/12PS-IIIi-j-34)
6. Explain the precautionary measures indicated in various cleaning products
not be available, provide print outs of
and cosmetics (S11/12PS-IIIi-j-35) the different articles. You can also save
the web pages and share the soft copy
with learners.
1. Identify active and major ingredients in cleaning and personal care products Resources&
(1) Surfactant. (2016). In Encyclopedia Britannica online. Retrieved
2. Explain the mode of action and precautionary measures indicated in various
March 27, 2016, from http://www.britannica.com/science/
cleaning products and cosmetics
surfactant;
3. Create a set of guidelines in selecting healthy and environmentally safe products (2) additional resources at the end of the lesson
4. Explore and create alternative homemade cleaning and personal care products
199

Communicate learning objectives and important terms prominently on one side of the classroom so
1. Introduce the following learning objectives using any of the suggested protocols (Verbatim,
a. Give common examples of cleaning materials for the house and for personal care.
b. From product labels, identify the active ingredient(s) of cleaning products used at home.
c. Give the use of the other ingredients in cleaning agents.
d. Give common examples of personal care products used to enhance the appearance of the
human body.
e. Identify the major ingredients of cosmetics such as body lotion, skin whitener, deodorants
and perfume.
f. Explain the precautionary measures indicated in various cleaning products and cosmetics.
a. Biodegradable e. Emulsifier
b. Non-biodegradable f. Buffer
c. Oxo-biodegradable g. Emollient
d. Surfactants h. Oxidizer
Products in My World Activity

Products in My World
200
Advanced Assignment (10 minutes to give the homework)
Assign three to four learners for each of the products listed below to be brought to class. Have
those assigned to each product agree to bring different brands so they can be compared. Make
sure they bring the products in their original containers with labels intact.
• Bath soap
• Powdered detergent
• Bleach
Teacher&Tips:&
• Baby powder
• Hand and body lotion Change or add to the list depending on
your and the learners’ preference.
• Shampoo
Product exploration (30 minutes)

The learners will fill the table below using the products they brought to class. The “Mode of
Action” in the last column will be filled out AFTER the learners have conducted independent
research. During the activity, remind them to observe the products with caution, particularly in
smelling and touching as they may have harmful effects upon contact.
Texture, odor,
Guidelines in Precautions in Mode of Action
Product Active/ major color of product
Product using the using the of Active
description ingredient *observe
product product ingredient
CAUTION
Bath Soap
• Brand X
• Brand Y
Detergent
• Brand X
• Brand Y
201
Texture, odor,
Guidelines in Precautions in Mode of Action
Product Active/ major color of product
Product using the using the of Active
description ingredient *observe
product product ingredient
CAUTION
Bleach
• Brand X
• Brand Y
Baby Powder
• Brand X
• Brand Y
Hand and Body
Lotion
• Brand X
• Brand Y
Shampoo
• Brand X
• Brand Y
Class discussion / Independent research / Sharing
Recall, giving of instructions, introduction of terms (30 minutes)
Review the activity from the previous day. Ask the learners what products they looked into and the specific information that they needed to get
from the different products.
Inform the learners that they will have to conduct independent research to determine the mode of action of the different ingredients that they
have seen. Either have the groups pick which product they would like to work on or assign a product to a group. E.g. Group 1 - Bath soap,
202
Group 2 - Detergent, Group 3 - Bleach, etc. Two groups may have the same products. Each group
should have 3 to 4 members.
Before the groups proceed with their independent research, give them an overview of the terms that
they will encounter. Possible terms are:
a. Biodegradable - capable of being decayed by the action of living organisms. The number of
Teacher&Tips:&
years depends on many factors such as the kind of waste, environmental temperature and type of
microorganism. Encourage the learners to list down their
questions whenever they encounter terms
b. Non-biodegradable - incapable of being decayed by the action of living organisms
that are difficult to understand during their
c. Oxo-biodegradable - capable of being decayed by living organisms only after the help of metal research. Inform them that they will have a
salts added in the material’s composition. The metal salts speeds up the initial decay process after chance to present those questions during
consultation with you.
which the process is left to microorganisms to finish.
d. Surfactants - a surface active agent, capable of reducing the surface tension of liquids. For
example, in washing oil off plates, surfactants help the oil and water come together by weakening
the surface tension of oil.
e. Emulsifier - encourages the suspension of one liquid in another (e.g. margarine is a mixture of oil
and water). It is also called a stabilizer. It extends storage life and prevents separation of ingredients.
f. Buffer - a solution of acid and base or salt that helps maintain the pH of a solution constant.
g. Emollient - any substance that softens the skin by slowing the evaporation of water.
h. Oxidizer - a substance that oxidizes another substance. Oxidizing a substance may mean
supporting combustion, helping a substance breakdown, etc.
Consultation / Independent Research and writing (120 minutes)

Allow the learners enough time in class to do one-on-one consultation, independent research and to
write their reports. You may do this project with the help of the English teacher. It may be used to teach
research techniques. During consultation, have the learners bring necessary information/ articles that Guide the learners on how to make an
they need help with and to prepare questions ahead of time. outline of their report as a method of doing
research.
Instruct the learners to research on the mode of action of the major/active ingredient in their chosen/
assigned product. The fact sheet they will make from their research will be in the form of a poster. It can
either be electronic or handwritten. Provide the fact sheet guidelines for the project as listed below.
203
Fact Sheet Guidelines Teacher&Tips:&
1. Data on active/ major ingredient:
Show samples if this is the first time that the
a. Chemical formula (and structure if available) class will be making a fact sheet. Fact
b. Mode of action sheets are usually one to two pages long.
c. Where the ingredient comes from A fact sheet normally includes:

d. How the ingredient should be handled, what are its precautionary measures? - title/heading
- diagram/drawing/picture
e. Other uses of the chemical - statistics in the form of a graph/ chart
f. How does the chemical affect the environment? (if available) - easy to read descriptions written in outline
or paragraph form
g. Is the chemical biodegradable or not? (if available) - sources of information
h. Is the chemical natural or synthetically derived? (if available)
Warn the learners that there will be
i. Are there alternatives for this chemical? What are the alternatives? (if available) opposing opinions on the chemicals that
they will be researching. Their task is to be
as objective as possible in presenting data.
*a to e are mandatory information that the learners must look for. It is up to them to decide whether these
components are harmful or not, and
whether they would use it again.
2. Check multiple sources and make sure to cite them. Learners may use MSDS sheets (Material
Safety Data Sheet) which should be available online.
3. Learners will use mostly internet sources so guide them in selecting good websites. Helpful
websites are:
Chemicals of Concern
http://www.safecosmetics.org/get-the-facts/chemicals-of-concern/ (last accessed March 27, 2016)
Bleach A good e-book on soap and detergent can
be found in this site:
http://www.madehow.com/Volume-2/Bleach.html (last accessed March 27, 2016) http://www.cleaninginstitute.org/assets/1/
Household Products Database AssetManager/
SoapsandDetergentsBook.pdf (last
https://householdproducts.nlm.nih.gov/ (last accessed March 27, 2016) accessed March 27, 2016)
Soaps and Detergents: Products and Ingredients http://www.cleaninginstitute.org/clean_living/
soaps__detergents_products__ingredients.aspx (last accessed March 27, 2016)
204
Teacher&Tips:&
Household Chemicals Chart: Whats in my House

At the end of the topic, give learners
http://my.clevelandclinic.org/health/healthy_living/hic_Steps_to_Staying_Well/ alternatives and tips on selecting healthier
hic_Household_Chemicals_Chart_Whats_in_my_House (last accessed March 27, 2016) and environmentally friendlier products by
directing them to the following websites:
‘Dirty Dozen’ cosmetic chemicals to avoid
http://davidsuzuki.org/issues/health/science/toxics/dirty-dozen-cosmetic-chemicals/ (last accessed Campaign for Safe Cosmetics
http://www.safecosmetics.org/ (last
March 27, 2016)
accessed March 27, 2016)
The “Dirty Dozen” Ingredients Investigated in the Suzuki Foundation Survey of Chemicals in
Cosmetics (October 2010) Personal Care Recipes with Coconut Oil
by Mike Chapman (October 25, 2015)
http://www.davidsuzuki.org/issues/downloads/Dirty-dozen-backgrounder.pdf http://www.organiclifestylemagazine.com/
personal-care-recipes-with-coconut-oil
3. The fact sheet should be creative, inviting, and informative.
Healthier Hygiene by Matthew Hoffman,
MD
Sharing (30 minutes) http://www.webmd.com/health-ehome-9/
healthier-hygiene (last accessed March 27,
2016)
When the groups are done with their fact sheets, have them share their work in to their classmates.
Non-Toxic Home Cleaning
Each learner should read the work of others to try and find similarities and differences in the http://eartheasy.com/
ingredients. live_nontoxic_solutions.htm (last accessed
March 27, 2016)
Having read the fact sheets and after conducting their own research, ask the learners to create their 9 Cleaners You Can Make Yourself
own guidelines in choosing a safer, healthier and environmentally friendlier product. Answers can be: http://www.goodhousekeeping.com/home/
cleaning/tips/a24885/make-at-home-
cleaners/ (last accessed March 27, 2016)
I will:
27 Chemical-Free Recipes for DIY Spring
1. be proactive and will research on the products that I am using Cleaning
2. choose products that have a short ingredient list (10 or less ingredients) http://greatist.com/health/27-chemical-free-
products-diy-spring-cleaning (last accessed
3. buy products that are biodegradable March 27, 2016)
4. read the proper disposal of products and make sure to follow them
For # 2. This is often prescribed as a general rule of thumb, this is not necessarily true for all but is a
good guide.
205
Healthy Options Activity (75 minutes, depending on the number of learners)
Healthy Options
Divide the class in groups of 3-4 members and have them explore homemade alternative products for their personal hygiene and their
household cleaning use. Have them research to create/replicate the alternative product. Each group will have to demonstrate the process to the
class, describe the creation, use, mode of action and disposal of the homemade product.
The demonstration can span 5-6 minutes, including a short question and answer portion.
Fact sheet, Classroom Demonstration

Evaluate learners’ understanding form their fact sheet and demonstration.
Fact Sheet Rubrics

Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pt)
A good amount of
All information are Most Information are Information is
Accuracy of the information is
accurate and well accurate and well accurate with some
information inaccurate and/ or
supported supported vague points
vague
206
Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pt)
Information are Information are clear
clearly presented and
Information are Information is unclear
ordered in such a way
Organization clearly presented and Order of information and written in
that it brings a full
ordered does not clearly show random order
picture of the
material cohesiveness
Diagram/image is Diagram/image is
Use of diagram / helpful and helpful and Included a diagram/ Included a diagram/
image positioned positioned image image
appropriately appropriately
Spelling and All spelling and Some spelling and Some spelling and Notable spelling and
grammar grammar are correct grammar error grammar error grammar error
Submitted after the
Punctuality Submitted on time Submitted on time Submitted on time
deadline
Fact sheet is
Fact sheet is neat Fact sheet is mostly Fact sheet appears
generally neat and
and incorporates neat and messy and poorly
incorporates
appropriate designs. incorporates designs designed
appropriate designs
Visual appeal / It is visually inviting Visually pleasing and Readable
Creativity and easy to read readable Font does not seem
Visually inviting and
Font does not seem to complement
easy to read
Uses appropriate to complement objects used
Uses appropriate
layout objects used
layout
207
Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pt)
Teamwork Teamwork
Used varied sources
Sources are not
Used varied and
Used varied and Most sources are varied, some are
reliable sources
Sources reliable sources reliable unreliable Sources
Most sources are
All sources are cited
cited
Most sources are Few sources are cited
cited
TOTAL:
Highest possible score is (4 x 8)/8 = 4 (8 Components)
208
Adjectival Rating Rating Range Grade Range
Excellent 3.4 - 4.0 95 - 100
Merit 2.6 - 3.3 88 - 94
Achieved 1.8 - 2.5 81 - 87
Needs Improvement 1 - 1.7 75 - 80
Sample score sheet:
Criteria Score
Organization 3
Use of diagram / image 3
Spelling and grammar 3
Punctuality 4
Visual appeal / Creativity 3
Teamwork 4
Sources 2
TOTAL 26
26 pts / 8 categories = 3.25 
Learner is within the Merit range and the teacher may choose a grade within this range.
209
Demonstration Rubric

Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pt)
Unable to relay
Explains information Explains information Able to relay
information well
with minimal errors with minimal errors information
Accuracy of A good amount of
Information are Most information are Information is
information the information is
accurate and well accurate and well accurate with some
inaccurate and/ or
supported supported vague points
vague
Information are clear
Information are
Information is unclear
clearly presented and Order of information and presented in
Information are
ordered in such a way does not clearly show random order
clearly presented and
that it brings a full cohesiveness
ordered
Organization picture of the
product Demonstration is
Demonstration is Demonstration is hard to follow and
easy to follow generally easy to jumps from one
Demonstration is follow, required procedure to another
easy to follow prompting once in a
while
All ingredients are
All ingredients are
brought
All ingredients in All ingredients in brought
proper amount are proper amount are Equipment are
Readiness of Equipment are
brought brought appropriate, some
materials inappropriate and/or
Equipment are Equipment are needed to be
needed to be
appropriate appropriate borrowed from
borrowed from
classmates
classmates
210
Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pt)
Enthusiastic in
presenting
Invites audience to
help and try the Enthusiastic in Voice is inaudible at
product presenting times
Voice is audible
Includes personal
Communication touches in the Voice is audible and Appears
skills / Presentation presentation Uses appropriate
inviting disinterested
language and
Uses appropriate Generally uses
gestures
Voice is audible and language and appropriate language
inviting gestures and gestures
Uses appropriate
language and
gestures

Teamwork
211
Criteria Score
(4 pts) (3 pts) (2 pts) (1 pt)
Used varied sources
Used varied and Sources are not
Used varied and
reliable sources Most sources are varied, some are
reliable sources
Sources reliable unreliable
Most sources are
All sources are cited
cited Most sources are Few sources are cited
cited
TOTAL:
Highest possible score is (4 x 6)/6 = 4 (6 Components)
Sample score sheet
Criteria Score
Organization 3 Adjectival Rating Range Grade Range

Rating
Readiness of materials 3
Excellent 3.4 - 4.0 95 - 100
Communication skills / Presentation 3
Merit 2.6 - 3.3 88 - 94
Teamwork 4
Achieved 1.8 - 2.5 81 - 87
Sources 2
Needs 1 - 1.7 75 - 80
TOTAL 19 Improvement
19 pts / 6 categories = 3.16 
Learner is within the Merit range and the teacher may choose a
grade within this range.
212
Emulsifier. (2015). In Encyclopedia Britannica online. Retrieved March 27, 2016, from http://www.britannica.com/science/emulsifier
Buffer. (n.d.). In Encyclopedia Britannica online. Retrieved March 27, 2016, from http://www.britannica.com/science/buffer-chemistry
Emollient. (2014). In Encyclopedia Britannica online. Retrieved March 27, 2016, from http://www.britannica.com/topic/emollient
Biodegradable vs Oxo-biodegradable vs Compostable (n.d.) Retrieved March 27, 2016, from http://organics.org/biodegradable-vs-oxo-
biodegradable-vs-compostable/
213
Ancient Greek physics and astronomy

Learning(Competencies(
The learners should be able to: LESSON OUTLINE
1. Recognize(K) different naked-eye astronomical observations on diurnal and Introduction/( Define Science; Caloric Theory; and Development 30
annual motions of the sky pattern, precession and equinoxes as sense data. Review of scientific thinking
[IVa-37] Motivation Diurnal/daily and annual motion of the sky 10
2. Summarize(K) ancient Greek on the three types of terrestrial motion and the
Instruction(/( The two-domain view, types of terrestrial motion, 20
perfection of celestial motion. [IVa-36] Delivery naked-eye astronomical observations, proofs of
3. Enumerate(K) naked-eye astronomical proofs that the Earth is round or spherical earth.
spherical. [IVa-38] Practice Assignment- Summarizing ancient Greek two- 0

domain system in a table with the types of motion
Speci1ic(Learning(Outcomes( and the four-element model of matter.
Enrichment Myths and legends the appearance of the sky. 0
1. Write a summary of ancient Greek two-domains view Appreciation of scientific progress in terms of
2. Tabulate of the different material elements and motion according to the observation, exploration and discovery.
two-domains view Evaluation Summarize ancient Greek two-domain system in a 0

table; Identify at least one naked-eye
3. List the naked-eye astronomical proofs that the Earth is round or spherical
astronomical proof that the Earth is round or
spherical.
Materials • Pictures of ancient Greek philosophers:

Pythagoras, Socrates, Plato, Aristotle
• A chart tabulating the two-domain view of
the Universe and the corresponding elements
and motions
• Download the application: Stellarium.
Resources(
(1) Naked-eye observations that prove that Earth is round. PhysLink.com
(1995-2016). Retrieved from http://www.physlink.com/Education/
AskExperts/ae535.cfm;
214
INTRODUCTION / REVIEW (30 MINS) Teacher(Tips:(
Ask the learners to cite the concepts they have learned from the previous lesson before You may show slides or pictures from
proceeding to the new topic. previous lessons as a refresher.
Define science as “a collection of known truths about the Universe that develops and expands Write the definition on the board. You can
also provide a hand-out or use a slide
over time.” Discuss why science is dynamic and ever changing. Explain that science develops presentation.
when better models are found, clearer and more useful mechanisms are used to explain a group
of phenomena, more accurate and precise details are observed, and many more. Pose questions to encourage discussion.
Examples:
When do you think is a scientific theory
Mention that astronomy is a major influence to the development of Physics. That is why we discuss rejected?
ancient Greek philosophy, cosmology and astronomy. The Greeks divided the universe into Is scientific theory final?
domains, the celestial domain and the terrestrial domain. Give the Caloric Theory as an example of a
theory that has been superseded by
another theory, the Kinetic Molecular
Theory.
Caloric theory = objects become hot as

they absorb a fluid called “caloric.” Caloric
is not created nor destroyed. It can only be
transferred from one object to another via
contact. The capacity of the object
determines the temperature, given the
same amount of caloric.
In Kinetic Molecular Theory, heat is energy

convertible from other forms and may be
converted to other forms. It is significant in
the Principle of Conservation of Energy
since most energies may be converted to
heat but not fully the other way around.
215
Teacher(Tips:(
Show the learners pictures of Greek philosophers and ask them to identify each one. Indicate the
period when they lived.
The learners are not expected to know
these philosophers outright so give an
The learners are not expected to know these philosophers outright so give an advance research advance research assignment on the names
Pythagoras, Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle.
assignment on the names Pythagoras, Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle. Require the learners to
Require the learners to include range of
include range of lifetime, to research on how they are possibly related to each other, and to lifetime, to research on how they are
provide names of other philosophers connected to them. possibly related to each other, and to
provide names of other philosophers
connected to them.
Mention that the Greeks started with what they can see.
A. Celestial Domain The list of observations is found in

Appendix A.
Discuss the following naked-eye observations that are available to the Greeks that led to the
belief that the Earth must be round and not flat.
Diurnal/daily motion of the sky
Use the Stellarium application to display the

Diurnal/daily motion of the sky daily motion of the sky if readily available,
or have the learners download and view the
Stellarium as an assignment.
Option 1: Show the learners a sequence of pictures of the sky (either animated or in a sequence of
still pictures) that was time-lapsed for 24 hours from the same location.
Option 2: Give this as an advanced project/assignment. Instruct the learners to take pictures of the
You may assign a group to make a journal or
sky using their mobile phones or digital camera. Remind them to take the pictures from the same put up an online blog where the sequence
location and to take precautions in observing the Sun. Have the learners arrange and label the of pictures can be posted and discussed.
pictures in sequence.
216
From what they’ve seen from the photos, ask the learners what they noticed about the movement of
the objects in the sky. Lead them to describe the change in position of the stars at different hours of
the night.
Annual motion of the sky

Teacher(Tips:(
Learners cannot do this themselves since

Show a sequence of pictures of the sky (either animated or sequence of still pictures) taken every they would need at least a month to
two weeks over a period of one year from the same position. capture obvious movement of planets and
the moon. You can use Stellarium for this.
Mention that modern scientists know these patterns are produced because the Earth spins on its
own axis and revolves around the sun. In contrast, ancient observers created many myths and As an example, you may cite that in
legends about these stars and planets to explain the regularity of the patterns in the sky. Egyptian mythology, the Sun is the chariot
of the sun god Ra. The sun moves because
Ra travels across the sky on it. The sun
disappears when Ra goes to sleep at night.
The teacher may also use local myths as

additional examples.
Discuss how some Greeks chose to avoid supernatural beliefs (gods and goddesses) in explaining
phenomena and focused instead on natural causes Some learners may ask about conflicts
between science and religion. Mention that
some religious beliefs may be found
consistent and even supportive of honest
scientific achievements.
Limiting explanations within the scope of

natural causes does not necessarily restrict
the belief in supernatural beings such as
God and angels. Scientific natural
explanation for a phenomenon does not
translate to non-existence of such beings.
217
B. Terrestrial Domain
Proceed to discussing the motion of objects on Earth. Together with the observations of the sky
pattern and many philosophical explanations based on natural causes, we also observe that Teacher(Tips:(
objects on Earth and their motion are constantly changing. The contributions related to astronomy and
physics of different philosophers are in
Appendix A.
Constant change is brought about by disintegration or corruption of things into more basic parts,
and the need for constant intervention (e.g. force) that keep things from their original state or If time does not permit, you can turn this
condition. Ask the learners to recall their experience of walking as tiresome, hence the need for cars part into a reading assignment by referring
to keep moving. Cite the need for carabaos or cows to pull plows for farming, and then the need for learners to online resources or books
available in the library.
tractors.
You may use an instruction jacket to list the
philosophers and their contributions.
Discuss how the Greeks were able to formulate many theories of the sky and of the Earth based on
observation of natural phenomena. Cite the theory of Pythagoras, Socrates, Plato, Eudoxus and
Aristotle as among those that were convincing and useful.
Discuss how the Ancient Greek philosophers differentiated between the movement of objects on The table of the two-domain view of the
Earth and of objects in the Sky. They came up with what we now refer to as the “two-domain view” Universe is found in Appendix B. 
 
of the universe. Discuss the contents of the two-domain view by showing them the differences in the  
elements and motions.  
 
 
 
PRACTICE  
 
 
Make a table on the board with the following columns: Philosopher name, lifetime period and Instruct the learners to post the completed
philosophical contribution. table on their blogs to be checked online. If
online work is not possible, have them
manually fill up the table to be submitted
For an assignment, ask the learners to fill in the columns with a timeline showing the possible next meeting.
overlap of the lives of these philosophers. They may add other philosophers who were
contemporaries of the four.
218
ENRICHMENT Teacher(Tips:(
See if learners can provide myths and legends about the Moon, eclipse, etc. Start a discussion on You can give this as an assignment if there is
not enough time.
the social effects these had to the community (either local or national). Ask if the learners can
provide possible explanations of how the myths and legends came to be. The group may make a blog entry about
the discussions to extend the presentation
of the myths/legends.
Summarize the scientific progress using the story of “A Night in a Museum.” Scientific progress is a
process that includes making mistakes in trying to discover the right path. Point out that science The story can be patterned after the one in
requires patience and diligence. Appendix C.
EVALUATION
Give a matching type quiz that connects philosophers with their philosophical contribution.
Another option is to fill out a diagram with domains with corresponding elements and motions found
in these domains.
Ask the learners to provide naked-eye observations showing that the Earth is round.
219
Appendix A: Observations and ancient Greek Philosophers.
Observations leading to the belief that the Earth is round.
1. Observing lunar eclipses (i.e. when the earth blocks the sun from the moon, casting its round shadow on the moon's surface (PhysLink.com.
(1995-2016). Retrieved from http://www.physlink.com/Education/AskExperts/ae535.cfm.
2. “Simultaneously measuring the length of the shadows cast by identical poles perpendicular to a flat surface that is tangential to the earth's
radius at various, distant locations. If indeed the earth is round, then the shadows should all vary in length from one distant location to another.
This means that the angle at which the parallel rays of sunlight struck each pole varied from one location to another. (Recall the alternate-angles
theorem from Geometry class) If the earth is flat, then the lengths of all the shadows should be identical when measured simultaneously, since
all rays of sunlight that strike the earth are parallel. However, they are not identical, but in fact, vary in such a way that the angles indicate a
spherical surface. (This was one of the earliest methods to determine the radius of the earth)” (PhysLink.com. (1995-2016). Retrieved from
http://www.physlink.com/Education/AskExperts/ae535.cfm.) NOTE: The sunlight rays are near parallel because the Sun is practically very far
from the Earth.
3. More lists can be found in the section “Summary of evidence for a spherical Earth” (n.d.) In Wikipedia. Retrieved date, from https://
en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spherical_Earth#Summary_of_evidence_for_a_spherical_earth
Ancient Greek Philosophers
Pythagoras (c. 570 - c. 495 BC) — Universe is mathematical; mathematics as the best way to express truth about the Universe; Sun, moon and
Earth are spherical; placed Earth as the center of the Universe. [3,7]
Plato (c. 427 - c. 347 BC) — attainment of perfection as absence of change; mathematical symmetries to demonstrate perfect shapes (sphere
and circle); celestial spheres being crystalline and contains the moon, the Sun and the stars; explaining the shadows — read on Plato’s Allegory
of the Cave and the Allegory of the Divided Line — as his description or framework on how to look at the Universe, in particular that the daily
and annual patterns of the sky must have a greater reality besides its appearance. [2]
Eudoxus (of Cnidus, 408 - 355 BC) — followed previous models of the universe but added auxiliary spheres to provide appropriate tilt to the
planets’ path [7]
220
Aristotle (384 - 322 BC) — two-domain system with terrestrial domain containing four elements that tries to attain perfection by being in their
natural location relative to the center of the Universe: the center of the Earth. He was a learner of Plato. [4]
221
Appendix B: Two-domain view of the Universe
Domain Elements Motion
Terrestrial domain fire  alteration 

air  natural motion 
water  violent motion
earth
Celestial domain ether perfect motion: circular and constant speed
Table B1. Summary of the ancient Greek two-domains view of the Universe.
Table B1 summarizes the ancient Greek two-domains view of the Universe. According to them, the Universe is divided into two domains:
Terrestrial and Celestial domains. The Celestial domain is perfect hence can only be made up of the perfect substance they called “ether” and
can only move in perfect motion: circular in path and constant in speed.
The terrestrial domain objects are imperfect and that the tendency of things to attain perfection is the cause of their motion. Meanwhile, they
also believed that things, depending on their composition of the elements — fire, air, water, and earth — tend to move towards the center of
the Universe (center of the Earth) or away from it with earth, naturally, as at the center. Fire and water naturally move away from the center.
Based on the notion of how the Universe is made up and the tendency of things to move towards their perfection, natural motion is believed as
that brings things towards their more perfect state. Thus, heavy objects fall “faster” than lighter ones. Even so, they already know the effect of
air drag being related to medium density (air or water) as well as the mass of the object. Their notion of falling faster may be closer to terminal
speed than the concept of acceleration. [8]
222
Appendix C: A night at a museum
Knowledge of truth can be likened to a visit to a museum at night.
Imagine a museum full of painting and other artworks. As one enters the museum through the door, one can imagine a case when the light in
the museum is currently off, hence the artworks cannot be recognized or seen.
Once a switch is turned ON, only a certain portion of the museum is lit and thus only those artworks illuminated is seen initially. Once the eyes
get accustomed to the bright illumination it eventually recognizes and sees the artwork in view. One could also imagine that the gaze depends
on the interest at the moment so that other artworks may not be in view despite being illuminated by light. Either way, it does not mean that
the other artworks are not present in the museum.
Knowing is like being able to see the artworks as their images are seen through the eyes in the presence of light. The ideas in our mind is the
analogy of the images we see and the things observed are the artworks. Our limited knowledge means that not all the artworks have been
illuminated yet, the illumination obscures our sight, or our sight is not yet accustomed to the illumination.
Glossary
Diurnal motion of the sky — the appearance that the objects in the sky moves relative to the Earth’s local horizon (celestial objects: moon, Sun,
stars, planets; there were only five known planets: Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn) as observed for one whole day at the same location on
Earth. See URL reference.
Annual motion of the sky — the appearance that objects in the sky moves relative to the background stars as observed at the same time of the
day and at the same location on Earth.
223
“Summary of evidence for a spherical Earth” (n.d.) In Wikipedia. Retrieved date, from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
Spherical_Earth#Summary_of_evidence_for_a_spherical_earth
Plato. (n.d.) In Wikipedia. Retrieved date, from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plato
Pythagoras. (n.d.) In Wikipedia. Retrieved date, from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pythagoras
Aristotle. (n.d.) In Wikipedia. Retrieved date, from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aristotle
Diurnal motion (also known as “diurnal cycle”). (n.d.) In Wikipedia. Retrieved date, from https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diurnal_motion;
Other resource: http://astronomy.swin.edu.au/cosmos/D/Diurnal+Motion

Lecture 6: Daily & Annual Motions. Richard W. Pogge (2007 September 17). Retrieved date from http://www.astronomy.ohio-state.edu/~pogge/
Ast161/Unit2/motions.html
Additional reading on the role of Greek philosophy and numerology:

Spielberg & Anderson (1995). Chapter 2. (title?) 2nd Ed. John Wiley & Sons, pp. 20-25
Arthur Stinner (1994). The story of force: from Aristotle to Einstein” Physics Education, Volume 2. Printed in UK. Online source Retrieved from
http://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/0031-9120/29/2/005/pdf or via Stinner’s website. Retrieved from http://www.arthurstinner.com/
stinner/pdfs/1994-storyofforce.pdf
224
Ancient Greek models of the Universe

Content&Standards&
1. Plato’s problem of “saving the appearances”; Allegory of the Cave and the LESSON OUTLINE
Analogy of the Divided Line
Introduction Ancient Greeks; Two-domain view of the 20
2. Progression of the ancient Greek models of the Universe from Plato to /&Review Universe and perfect modes of motion; and
Ptolemy (including, but not limited to that of Plato, Eudoxus, Aristotle, and the Ancient Greek models of the Universe
Ptolemy).
Motivation Guessing game 8
3. Discussion of the recorded proposal of Aristarchus and the measurement of
the Earth’s circumference by Eratosthenes. Instruction&/& Discussion of the different models of the 9
Delivery Universe from Plato to Ptolemy
1. Explain (K) how Plato’s problem of “saving the appearances” and the two- Practice Construction of time line of philosophers 5
domain system constrained the Greek models of the Universe. [IVa-39] Discuss advantages of a model against 3
Enrichment
2. Historical models of the Universe from the time of Plato to the time of the previous
Ptolemy; contributions from Plato, Eudoxus, Aristotle, Aristarchus, Hipparchus,
and Ptolemy [IVa-40] Evaluation Quiz on sketching the models 10
Speci2ic&Learning&Outcomes& Materials • Diagram of the Greek models of the

The learners should be able to Universe: Plato, Eudoxus, Aristotle and
Ptolemy
1. Discuss significance of Plato’s problem of “saving the appearances” to the
scientific mindset of the philosophers. • Videos of (or sequential pictures
showing) retrograde motion of planets
2. Tabulate philosopher name and the proposed model of the Universe and
place them in a time line. Connect the ancient models of the Universe to Resources&
(1) Allegory of the Cave: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
their proponents and according to the philosophical biases and the motion
Allegory_of_the_Cave; Analogy of the Divided Line: https://
of the sky observed.
en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Analogy_of_the_divided_line; Plato’s
3. Specify the additional feature of the new models required to match the philosophy can be found here: http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/
new observations of the annual motion of the sky. plato-metaphysics/;
225
Teacher&Tips:&
• Review the two-domain system discussed in the previous meeting.
• You may need to show them the table
• Provide more emphasis on the celestial domain where perfection is found in objects and made previously showing the two
motion. domains the elements that make up the
• Mention that the perfect motion according to the ancient Greeks are (1) circular in path and (2) things and the types of motions
allowed.
constant speed.
• Discuss that according to Plato the Universe is a rational place and that the Universe are seen • The take-off point here is more on the
as apparent. The ancient Greeks already know that mechanistic explanations must underlie celestial domain being perfect and
must follow perfect shape and motion.
these observations. Tell the story of the “Allegory of the Cave” and the “Analogy of the
Divided Line”. • A video may be shown to discuss this
• Introduce the topic of the day on the development of the Ptolemaic model of the Universe (videos of about 3 mins length each
exist) but make sure that a short
based on a two-domain view of the Universe discussed in the previous class meeting. discussion (about 2 mins each) be made
as open forum to thresh out
clarifications.

• Different details of the sky motion
progressed from generation to
Convince the students to be interested in finding out how the ancient Greeks modified their model
generation: basic daily and yearly
based on the new observations over many generations. Tell them that you will discuss the motion, difference in the axes of the
progression from a basic model of Plato to the best possible model of Ptolemy. planets (then five, excluding Earth),
appearance of retrograde motion.
Tell the students that the implication of the allegory and the analogy stories of Plato provided an
impetus in finding mechanistic explanations why things appear as such. • Alternatively, you may present videos of
illusions such as that in References.
These point to the fact that some
Guessing Game. To drive the point, draw in the board and have the students guess what they are. objects appear mysterious but can be
explained as a sort of mechanical trick
Sample puzzles are provided in Appendix A.
combined with a correct perspective
view.
Point out that the effectivity in realizing the solution to the puzzles or “mystery” is experience and
maturity in reasoning methods.
226
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY (5 MINS) Teacher&Tips:&
Tell the students that the most basic daily experience or basis for hypotheses about the Sky are the • You may again show slides, pictures or
diurnal and annual motion of the sky as presented last meeting. Mention the progression of the videos. If so, it may take more time for
this.
following basic observations.
(1) Diurnal motion of the Sun and the annual motion of the Moon.
• Videos or animations or sequence of
(2) Some planets wander from the background stars that appear to be fixed in position relative pictures of the retrograde motion of
to one another. planets, especially of Mars, can be
found online. Discussion on retrograde
(3) When seen from Earth, planets appear to undergo the retrograde motion relative to the motion is found in Appendix B.
background stars.
Discuss that from the above observations, different philosophers proposed basic models that • You may read Appendix B for this.
improved on previous ones starting from Plato, Eudoxus of Cnidus, Aristotle, and eventually
Ptolemy to explain and “save the appearance” of the skies.
• Sketching it on the board allows the

Sketch on the board the different models of the Universe and their corresponding proponents. You
student to see how it’s done. You may
may copy the sample sketches per Greek proponent provided in Appendix B. You may search from ask them to copy the sketches on the
the web images sample sketches. board to make sure that they
understand.
Concentrate discussion on the part when retrograde motion was discovered and had to be • Appendix C tabulates the device and
explained by the model. The solution was to introduce the “devices” that explains the appearance the effects.
of the motion.
• See the Resources for sketches and/or

Either using animation (gif), video, or sketches discuss how retrograde motion is produced by the
videos online.
model of Ptolemy.
Discuss that the models required to follow the well-established two-domain view of the Universe:
that the models must consider the celestial object as perfect (spherical) and moving at perfectly
circular path and perfectly constant speed along the path.
227
PRACTICE (5 MINS)
On a time line, write the names of the philosophers discussed to give the students an overview of Teacher&Tips:&
the development of the models.
• A sample timeline is proposed in
Appendix D.
ENRICHMENT (3 MINS)
Ask the students for their opinions as to what could have been happening during the long period • One can have it assigned to the
students to find out who these
when nothing was written by philosophers. The answer is that there are mathematicians and
philosophers are and discuss what
philosophers who improved on the previous models. improvements they contributed.
• You may mention that ancient

Other philosophers proposed other models closer to our models today such as the Sun-centered philosophers are not ignorant of the
Universe of Aristarchus of Samos (310-230 BC). possible immensity of the Universe.
However, their models may be based
on wrong reasoning due to lack of
Eratosthenes (276-195 BC) was able to propose a highly accurate measure of the Earth’s reliable physical data.
circumference based solely on the observed shadows of objects on the Earth’s surface and the use of
• See References for links to their stories.
geometry.
• These are points raised to emphasize

Mention that other astronomers such as Callipus improved on the other models to account for minor
that astronomical modeling requires
variations of the Sun’s period. [http://astronomy.swin.edu.au/cosmos/C/Callippus]. Accordingly, accuracy of the models when placed
Eudoxus used 27 spheres, while Callpus used 34 spheres and were used to align with the observed side by side with the available data.
tropical year (length of time between successive equinoxes, about 365.25 days).
EVALUATION (10 MINS) • This may take longer than 5 mins since
preparation of 1/2 sheet of pad paper
Give a quiz requiring the student to sketch the model of the Universe as proposed by each of the may take a while besides the quiz
following Greek philosophers: Plato, Aristotle, Ptolemy.  proper.
228
Appendix A: Sample drawing for Guessing Game
Sample drawings and their solutions for the Guessing Game. You may add more items or pictures of objects taken in unconventional
perspectives. Avoid perspective pictures that may illicit possibly offensive images to some students.
Appendix B: Appearance of the sky and the mechanistic models to produce them
Retrograde motion
Planetary retrograde motion is the temporary “reversal” of its motion relative to the stars in its annual motion. A typical illustration of retrograde
can be found online. An example is shown below, taken from http://www-personal.ksu.edu/~lyman/english233/images/Mars_retrograde.gif
where the position of the planet at different days at the same time of the day/night. It undergoes a retrograde motion from August 1 to July 1
as labeled.  
229
Development of the Greek models of the Universe
1. The regularity of the diurnal and annual motions of the sky can be explained by the basic model of Plato: spherical crystalline shells
containing the Sun, Moon, and the five planets (Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn). The stars are fixed in the outermost crystalline
sphere that rotates annually. You may add that Plato is able to that the Platonic solids can be used as a rational for the proper sequence of
the planets, but this is not necessary. A sample slide is shown below.
230
2. Since the planets wander even more than previously only roughly observed, a need for more refined separate spheres to mechanically and
visually produce them is required. This is answered by the model of Eudoxus of Cnidus. A sample slide is below. The 27 auxiliary spheres are
needed to produced the appearance that planets deviate from each other’s path.
231
3. Aristotle improved on the model like that of Eudoxus to make it more consistent with his theory of motion — his theory of causes. Aristotle
argued that the motion of the celestial objects can be traced to a Prime Mover that because of its basic movement, all other crystalline
spheres move accordingly. This model requires a geometric and mathematical feat so as to fix the gear ratio of the spheres as well as the
correct tilts of their axes relative to each other to produce the same appearance! A sample slide is shown here.
4. The appearance of the retrograde motion necessitates the addition of more mechanisms called “devices” to produce the visual motion of
the planets. Due to complications, the Aristotelian Prime Mover is ignored and instead other philosophers concentrated on the production
of retrograde motion of all planets using “devices”. Among the devices, one can specifically focus on the combination of deferent and the
epicycles. These devices, though complicates the original model, is most practically accurate during that era. The following sample slides
shows the complicated model and the operation of the devices in producing the apparent retrograde motion of the planets.
232
5. Ptolemy’s model can be subsequently improved (as it was actually done) by adding more epicycles with smaller radius. Here’s a sketch of
how the devices result to the apparent retrograde motion [http://www.mysearch.org.uk/website1/html/17.Ptolemy.html]. 
233
Appendix C. Model devices and the appearances they “saved”
The different devices (two of the at least five used by Ptolemy) to explain the appearance of the corresponding motion.
234
Appendix D. A sample timeline showing the relative lifespan of the philosophers discussed
235
• There are many resources from the YouTube, Vimeo or other online public educational video repositories which you can search using
“allegory of the cave” and “analogy of the divided line” as search phrases. Opt for those with good positive reviews.
• Samples of YouTube videos of illusions may be found here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PBLOi6fbM7w; https://www.youtube.com/

watch?v=oy96UMdqnuE; or those made by Kokichi Sugihara such as those featured in https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=a59WImlqNWM
• Aristarchus and Eratosthenes may be read here: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Eratosthenes and https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Eratosthenes
• Retrograde motion is discussed here: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Apparent_retrograde_motion, similar URLs discuss it as in http://

earthsky.org/space/what-is-retrograde-motion
• A good alternative source of the history of Cosmological models may be found from the American Institute of Physics link: https://
www.aip.org/history/cosmology/index.htm
236
Challenges to the Ptolemaic model of

the Universe LESSON OUTLINE
Content&Standards& Introduction Philosophy of Plato, Ptolemy’s model and the 5
1. Astronomical phenomenon known to astronomers before the advent of /&Review Ptolemaic system
telescopes. Discussion on Ptolemaic system and 30
Motivation
2. Observations that support the Ptolemaic system or the model’s Parallax activity
philosophical foundations.
Instruction&/& Assumptions in the Ptolemaic system, 20
Delivery Observations of Brahe and The Great
Learning&Competencies& Comet of 1577
1. Cite examples of astronomical phenomenon known to astronomers before
Evaluation Note down points for clarifications from 10
the advent of telescopes. [IVa-41]
the class
2. Identify observations that support the Ptolemaic model.
3. Explain how some of these observations weaken the support for the Materials Projector or screen for displaying videos
Ptolemaic model. (optional)
4. Explain why the Ptolemaic model is able to cope with the increasing
Resources&
accuracy of the observed positions of the celestial objects (1) Video showing a figure of Homer Simpson drawn using
Ptolemy’s deferent and epicycle upon epicycles: https://
www.youtube.com/watch?v=QVuU2YCwHjw;
(2) A good source of instructional materials regarding the epicycles
INTRODUCTION (5 MINS) may be found here: https://www.khanacademy.org/partner-
content/nasa/measuringuniverse/spacemath1/a/planets-
Remind the students of the topic discussed last meeting. Include important epicycles
concepts that have to be upheld by different models that are used to explain (3) For the discussion of Tycho Brahe’s discoveries and new data,
the “appearance” of the skies: (1) fundamental difference between terrestrial read Spielberg & Anderson “Seven Ideas that Shook the
and celestial domains, and (2) circular paths of constant speeds for the celestial Universe” (John Wiley & Sons: 1995) pp. 41-42.
objects being in their perfect state. (4) see additional resources at the end of the lesson
Tell the students that the Ptolemaic model is not completely successful in
237
predicting the positions of the planets as new and better observational data made available Teacher&Tips:&
because of the advances in measurement techniques.
• You may assign the students to research
on ancient devices used to observe and
Discuss that even if the Ptolemaic model is not entirely successful, it is a system that can
measure the skies beforehand.
accommodate new data by adding new epicycles.
• The system is general enough to

This accuracy and ability of the Ptolemaic model to be modified to adapt to new data is unrivaled generate any orbital figure or shape.
by other proposed models for 1,400 years. You may present a video showing that
the Ptolemaic system can generate the
figure of Homer Simpson. The link is in
References.
Discuss that while the Ptolemaic system is accurate, it is also consistent with the prevailing • The Ptolemaic system is consistent with
philosophical framework of understanding the Universe. the Two-Domains view. The two-
domains view is a belief that objects and
their motion on Earth (Terrestrial
Discuss the following expected physical observations on the surface of the Earth (terrestrial Domain) is different from the objects
domain). The expectations are based on the Aristotelian physics. found in the Sky (Celestial Domain).
(a) If the Earth rotates about its axis, given the calculated circumference of the Earth by
Eratosthenes all objects must be moving at about 2,000 kph. But no one feels a strong breeze.
(b) The spinning Earth would cause object to fly out, which does not happen.
(c) Falling things would veer towards the west as they fall, the arrows are not seen to veer away
from intended target.
(d) Spinning or orbiting Earth would require enormous amount of constant force to keep it
moving.
• You may write these on the board for

Discuss that the following naked eye observations support the Ptolemaic system where Earth does the students to copy.
not move (not even rotation about its own axis).
(a) No parallax of the stars, since the annual pattern of the planets does not change.
• If time does not permit, you may use
(b) The apparent size of the stars does not change. slide projector to show these on screen.
238
(c) Some basic physics in the terrestrial domain is not observed.
Introduce to the students that the class will be having an activity about parallax.
Teacher&Tips:&
Do the Parallax Activity described in Appendix A.
• You may extend this activity by using

objects that are farther or nearer.
• Let the students realize that the
INSTRUCTION / DELIVERY (20 MINS) parallax happens in differing degrees
depending on the distance of the
Discuss that both parallax and changes in the brightness of the stars are not observed at all, or at object from the observer. This is the
least not obvious since they can be alternately explained as atmospheric disturbance. same as we observe stars from Earth as
the Earth revolves about the Sun from
one location to another, six months
later (e.g. In June, the Earth is in the
opposite position relative to the Sun as
it was in December).
• Later, you may use this as recall
because the use of Galilean telescopes
still cannot observe the parallax effect
proving that stars are really far from the
Earth.
Besides not observing physical evidences, the Ptolemaic system is also largely consistent with the
prevailing philosophical framework of two domains. Discuss with the students whether they would • This activity will enable the students
retain Ptolemaic model or not when presented by this information and had lived in the time of practice objectivity in scientific
decisions based on the most reliable
Copernicus. available information.
• The Ptolemaic system is consistent with
the Two-Domains view. The two-
domains view is a belief that objects
and their motion on Earth (Terrestrial
Domain) is different from the objects
Deliver a lecture on the concepts that the Greek philosophers, mathematicians, and astronomers found in the Sky (Celestial Domain).
got right when modeling the Universe. The early philosophers and mathematicians utilizes the
prevailing philosophical framework in creating models. They had to remain consistent with the
current philosophy given the scarcity of reliable data. • See Appendix B for the contents.
239
Stress that while the details are different, the general philosophy is still followed regarding how we
look at nature and natural processes — models are dynamic and dependent on accurate observation
and measurement. Without data obtained through the senses, information about nature cannot be
obtained and models cannot be threshed out as false.
Point out to the students that the Ptolemaic model has become very cumbersome due to
complications that whenever a new epicycle has to be added to keep up with more accurate
measurements of positions of celestial objects. Ptolemaic model, although able to adapt, has
become too complicated to be a useful model. Teacher&Tips:&
Besides, no other model can rival the accuracy of the Ptolemaic system in predicting future celestial • Elicit critical thinking by asking them
events. Ask the students that had they lived in the times of the Greeks and in Europe even until the reasons why they would choose to still
believe the Ptolemaic model or why
1400s, would they opt for a simpler but slightly inaccurate model or a complicated but accurate they would go for a simpler model but
model in predicting celestial events? with comparable accuracy in predicting
the locations of planets and stars.
Discuss the following observations that did not need telescopes to observe (Tycho Brahe): • Appendix C provides some detail that
may be discussed.
(a) Supernova explosion of 11 Nov 1572 — named “Nova Stella”, now SN 1572
(b) Comet in 1577
(c) Better and more reliable data sets
• This can be an optional assignment.

Discuss how these observations affect the philosophical support to the Ptolemaic model and to the See Appendix C.
obvious need for new models. Mention the socio-political and religious disturbance in the European
region during this time.
Mention that next meeting you will be discussing how the use of telescopes led to the need to
replace the Ptolemaic model.
240
Teacher&Tips:&
Ask the students for points that need clarification. Make a note for discussion in the next meeting.
• If you need more time shelf the
questions for next meeting.
Appendix A: Parallax Activity
1. Draw any shape on the board (you can use “X” or a circle). Any object may also be used:
Place a small object (e.g. cellphone, small fruit). The object should be small enough so that an
extended arm with a thumb up can conceal it from one eye as follows.
2. Let the students cover (lightly, not pressing) one eye (most will likely cover their right eye).
3. Ask the students to extend their right arm while extending their thumb (as in “thumbs up”
gesture) so that it covers the shape drawn on the board. In this case, the remaining eye cannot
see the figure anymore. You may demonstrate it by doing it yourself.
4. Ask them whether their thumbs have successfully covered the figure on the board.
5. Once everybody got it, tell them not to move their arm and fingers which cover the figure/
object. However, tell them to uncover the first eye and instead cover the other eye.
6. Ask them whether they now see the object. Call a few students to tell the class how the object
shifted (whether to the right or left) as they shifted their “view” from one eye to another.
7. Discuss that the apparent shifting of the position of the object relative to the thumb, is called
parallax.
8. Tell them that by analogy, one eye represent the view from Earth in one month and the other
eye is the same view from the Earth after six months (on the assumption that it moves). The
change in the position of the stars and planets cannot be observed by naked-eye astronomy.
241
Appendix B: Summary of the nature of Greek philosophy
What they got right:

1. The workings of the Universe can be explained using mechanical models.
2. They know that the celestial object move in circular motion. They are almost right in the nature of planetary motion as almost circular. We
know for a fact that circle is a special case of ellipse.
3. The shape of the celestial objects are generally “spherical”. We also know for a fact that the Moon, the Sun and the planets are
practically spherical in shape.
4. Models should be improved with new observations. While the model is still based on the Ptolemaic system, the model is continually
improved by adding more devices as new and better observations are obtained. This appears as a pre-cursor to the way scientific
research is done today.
5. Given two models that are both able to explain the observed phenomena adequately, the simpler model is usually the better one. The
increased complexity of the modifications (i.e. adding more epicycles and deferent) about the year 1500 AD made it possible to consider
simpler models. The problem largely rests on accuracy of the proposed alternate model rather than simplicity.
6. They have recognized the need for more accurate measurements of the planets’ position in the sky. They knew that there is a need for
more accurate astronomical data.
What they got wrong are as follows.

The difficulty is that the new model has to somehow conform to the Two-Domains view of the Universe:
1. The Earth is the absolute center of the Universe.

2. The nature (things and their motion) of celestial domains (two-domain system) is fundamentally different from the terrestrial domains:
2.1. The nature of things are different: Celestial domain is made up of ether as perfect substance.
2.2. The physics of motion in the Celestial domain is perfect being circular and with constant speed.
242
Appendix C: A brief summary of the development of astronomy in Europe
You may read on the Tychonic system of Tycho Brahe in advance (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tycho_Brahe). Brahe (1546 - 1601) lived after
Copernicus (1473-1543). He tried to provide an alternative model of the Universe. By his time, the debate between the choice of a heliocentric
(Sun-centered) model and a geocentric (Earth-centered) has arisen since the Ptolemaic model has ended up being too complicated to be
useful.
Tycho Brahe made several important discoveries and based on his good observational skills, he was able to argue well that the observations
goes against several basic assumptions of the Ptolemaic system or paradigm.
Tycho Brahe’s notes about a “nova stella” (11

November 1572)
243
1. Supernova explosion of 11 Nov 1572 (Brahe named it “nova stella”, meaning “new star”, now named SN 1572). You can point the students
to read more details in the Wikipedia entry: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SN_1572. For this “nova stella” he observed the following:
1.1. The new object does not show daily parallax against the background stars unlike the planets and the Moon. Thus, it must be at least
farther than the Moon and the planets.
1.2. Over several months, no parallax was observed very unlike those of the planets that has annual motion.
244
1.3. He concluded that this object must be a fixed star in the celestial sphere containing the known stars. He published a book “De nova
stella.”
1.4. Consequence: According to the two-domain view of the Universe, the stars belong to the celestial domain and hence must be
perfect both in the substance (ether) and motion (perfect circular and constant speed). Stars must be eternal and never changing.
The appearance of a new star shows that they can be dynamic and hence not perfect.
1.5. As a consequence, because of Brahe’s prestige, he was able to secure funding from the heads of state. He further improved his data
collection.
2. Comet of 1577 (also known as “The Great Comet of 1577”). Brahe was able to show that the comet
(observed by everyone in the globe) goes through the known orbits of the planets.
2.1. While his model (Tychonic system) is used here, his proofs that the comet is beyond the terrestrial domain is convincing.
2.2. The crystalline celestial spheres may be displaced or discredited, as a consequence.
3. Brahe left behind thousands of very precise measurements he made of the comet's path, and these findings contributed to
Johannes Kepler's theorizing of the laws of planetary motion and realization that the planets moved in elliptical orbits. [4]
3.1. Consequence: Precise measurements led to Kepler (then his assistant) to easily fit a good empirical laws of planetary orbits.
In summary, Brahe did:

1. Discovery of a “nova stella”
1.1. It’s not due to earth’s atmosphere (no parallax).
1.2. Stars are not eternal.
2. Accurate astronomical data for his time

2.1. Stellar and planetary positions
2.2. Better measure of earth’s axial tilt
2.3. Anomalies in Ptolemaic model surfaced
3. Proved that comets are found in the Celestial Domain.

4. Removed the necessity of crystalline celestial spheres.
245
Tycho Brahe: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tycho_Brahe; Tychonic system as a hybrid model: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tychonic_system;

The Great Comet of 1577: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Great_Comet_of_1577; Supernova of 1572: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SN_1572
A good read on the historical account may be read here: http://tofspot.blogspot.com/2013/08/the-great-ptolemaic-smackdown.html
246
Ptolemic, Copernican and

Tychonic models of the LESSON OUTLINE
Universe Introduction/&
Review
Recall previous lesson and include naked-eye
observations during the time of Copernicus
and Brahe
10
Content&Standards& Instruction&/& Discuss emergence of at least three models 30

Delivery of the Universe:  
1. Three models of the Universe that are popular about 1600s: Ptolemaic,
Copernican and Tychonian. (1) Ptolemaic, (2) Copernican, and  
(3) Tychonic/Ursine model
2. Explanation for the retrograde motion of the planets as seen from the Earth.
Enrichment Discussion of reading material 10
Evaluation Sketching of the different models of the 10

1. Compare and contrast features of models and mechanical explanations of universe
the astronomical phenomena observed. [IVa-40] Materials 1. Sketches of the Ptolemaic, Copernican
2. Describe the most basic form of the models proposed by the following: and Typhonic/Ursine models (see
Ptolemy, Copernicus and Tycho Brahe. [S11/12PS-IVa-42] Appendix A)
3. Demonstrate how the Copernican model of the Universe greatly simplified 2. Video of Ptolemaic and Copernican
the explanation of retrograde motion of the planets. systems and retrograde motion
4. Explain how the Tychonic model of the Universe satisfies both the geo- and
Resources&
heliocentric frameworks. (1) Reading material (URL): Blog series entitled “The Great
Ptolemaic Smackdown” by Michael Flynn (http://
tofspot.blogspot.com/2013/08/the-great-ptolemaic-
smackdown.html);
(2) Models from where the Tychonic model may have been derived
can be read in the life of Nicolaus Reimers Ursus (“bear”), called
“Ursine model”. Read here: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
Nicolaus_Reimers
247
Try to recount the questions and clarifications not taken up last meeting. • Use the notes taken down last meeting
as guide.
Remind the students of the following observations done before the era of telescopes that • You may show them the pictures that
supported that the Earth is not in motion: you used in the previous meeting to
(1) No parallax is observed for stars. help them remember their questions.
• Allow some time for them to recall.
(2) Apparent size of stars do not change over the year.
(3) Basic physical expectations for moving Earth is not observed. • You may show slides for each of these
cases or remind them of the Parallax
experiment previously done to help
Discuss that the most significant observation that needs to be explained is the retrograde motion them remember these three points.
of the planets. This retrograde motion has been discussed in the previous meeting before the last • The key idea is that serious scientists
time (PSp-02). are convinced during the time of
Galileo that based on available data
and scientific reasoning / philosophy,
Inform them that being scientific means relying on the best available data at that time. Several the Earth is not moving.
models emerged champion in fitting to the data available. Tell the students that the best available
data were not able to discern which among the available model is correct and proponents had to • You may need to discuss or show a
video of the planets retrograde path.
rely on assumptions or philosophical arguments.
• You may read some of the Reading
Materials listed particularly #1 and #2.
Some books may also be read for
balance.
248
Mention that new models were proposed including the Tychonic/Ursine model — a hybrid of
heliocentric and geocentric models (also labeled “geoheliocentric system”). Teacher&Tips:&
• See Appendix A for the sketches.

Indicate that the real challenge for the scientist is how to discern which model best fits the
available data of their times. Mention that as a class, you will go through each of the following • Sketch the three models on board or
competing models: use the prepared materials to show and
discuss the respective systems. It is
(1) Ptolemaic system important to discuss that in all the
(2) Copernican system models, even by Kepler, the stars are
depicted to be “attached” to the
(3) Ursine/Tychonic system outermost sphere of stars. Typical
debate about it is more of the distance
rather than its nature being a spherical
shell (celestial sphere).
Discuss with the students what they think how such a model could be a good compromise • See Appendix B
between geocentric and heliocentric frameworks.
• You may just concentrate on the
retrograde motion explanation and
Discuss each model and how each are able to explain the main observation about the planets: avoid too much detail on the other
retrograde motion. Concentrate mainly on how the Copernican system explained it versus the way “devices” of the Ptolemaic system.
the Ptolemaic system does.
• Optional activity may be done under
“Activity 3” of Reference 8. It claims to
require 1 class period.
More detailed story of the different models are found online: “The Great Ptolemaic Smackdown”
by Michael Flynn written August 2013. (See reference link)
• The students may begin looking

You may assign to the students to unravel possible alternative models that were proposed starting with the work of Brahe, Ursus
between the the lifetime of Ptolemy and that of Tycho Brahe, but **before** the time of Kepler. backwards.
249
For a more mathematically-inclined class, you may challenge them to show that the Copernican
system, the Tychonic system, and the Ptolemaic system can be made mathematically equivalent with
regards to the explanation of the apparent retrograde motion of the planets.
The Ptolemaic system uses several other “devices” such as equant and eccentric. These devices,
including deferent and epicycle combinations are used by the Copernican system as corrections to
correspond to the astronomical data. You may discuss this in detail with the students if time permits.
If not, you may have it assigned as research paper.
Teacher&Tips:&
• If time does not permit, the students
Give a quiz to the students asking them to draw the three alternative models of the Universe. may be assigned to have it sketched in
the coupon bonds with appropriate
labels.
• These may be assigned as project.
250
Appendix A: Models popular during Brahe’s lifetime
Besides the Ptolemaic system, there are several other models proposed that equally adequately explain the data available to them. There are
three that will be compared and contrasted:
1. Ptolemaic system
2. Copernican system
3. Ursine/Tychonic system
These three are differentiated by their fundamental philosophy: geocentric, heliocentric, or both (geoheliocentric). The three models can be
summarized as the figure below depicts:
251
These models may be easily drawn or sketched on the board. For teachers who are particularly challenged in sketching, you may prepare
these sketches previously on another material or more permanent print. The figure below are sample sketches of the models above.
Notable differences are based on several criteria as in Table 1 below summarizes:
Model system Center Orbits Stars
Ptolemaic Earth All other celestial bodies orbit the Earth Outermost celestial sphere, fixed
Copernican Sun All planets including Earth orbits the Sun, only Moon Outermost celestial sphere, fixed
orbits the Earth
Ursine/Tychonic Earth The Moon and the Sun orbits the Earth, all other Outermost celestial sphere, fixed
planets orbit the Sun; debatable whether some of
orbits (or shells) transect each other; the version of
Tyco involves non-crystalline orbital spheres of the
planets
Table 1: Notable differences in the Model Systems considerable by the 16th century (excludes the Keplerian system)
Several notes regarding the model systems:

a. They are properly called “systems” because of their modeling paradigms since they all correspond well to the observed astronomical
data. These models are made before the advent of using telescopes to observe the celestial bodies.
b. The Ptolemaic system is a robust system that can be upgraded by adding new epicycles upon existing epicycles based on the need for
improvement as the data dictates. Hence, while it is accurate, the Ptolemaic system requires inherent increase in complexity requiring
mathematicians and specialists in the area.
c. The epicycles originated earlier than Ptolemy and are used to explain the apparent reversal (“retrograde motion”, as observed from
Earth) of planets in relation to the background stars when observed for the whole year (annual motion).
d. The Copernican system is proposed by Nicolaus Copernicus (see the Reference on Copernican model) to explain the retrograde motion
with the argument for simplicity. Due to lack of physical consistency with the prevailing Aristotelian Physics of his time (as in going against
252
the physical expectations discussed in the previous lesson PSp-03), the system is considered only as a “mathematical tool” rather than a
physical reality.
e. Tyco Brahe, with his vast amount of more reliable astronomical data (positions of celestial objects over many years) is convinced that the
Ursine model is a possible reality and added his version based on the data available. There are some subtle differences between Ursine
and Tychonic model but the essence of being geoheliocentric is glaring.
f. The reliability and consistency with the available data are equal for these systems. The debate is really more of their underlying
philosophical foundations and assumptions. Some details of these philosophical biases are detailed in literature especially that of the
blog in the reference “The Great Ptolemaic Smackdown”.
Appendix B: Retrograde motion according to the Copernican model
The generation of the apparent reversal motion of the planets (retrograde motion) are straightforwardly explained by the Ptolemaic model
using epicycles. The video reference #6 from YouTube best explains it.
For those students interested in the astronomical details of the retrograde motion of planets, you may point them to the following URL:
http://mars.nasa.gov/allaboutmars/nightsky/retrograde/
The retrograde motion according to the Ptolemaic system is the literal retrograde motion (though still apparent) due to the epicycles. The
constraints of the Ptolemaic system is the requirement of the two-domain framework that all celestial objects must be following purely
circular motion. Superposition of these circular motion, according to the Ptolemaic system reproduces the motions observed.
The Copernican system, inspired by simplicity, explains that the apparent retrograde motion is truly apparent due to the difference in the
orbital speeds of the planets. At different times of the year, the outer planet (such as Mars, relative to observer on Earth) moves as it does
usually across the fixed stars. However, once the Earth overtakes the planet (inner planets move faster than the outer planets according to
the model as they do as we know today), Mars apparently moves backwards until Earth sufficiently passes away at which point Mars starts to
follow and resume its apparent motion relative to the background stars.
The explanations of the two system is depicted in the Figure below.
253
Three volunteers may be asked to move about marked path as above. One is
designated as the Sun, the Earth and another planet. They will move along the
path and the “Earth” observer describes how the others move relative to him/her.
254
The heliocentric proposal of Copernicus is discussed in wikipedia.org: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/De_revolutionibus_orbium_coelestium
You may start looking for the retrograde motion of planets here: http://earthsky.org/space/what-is-retrograde-motion or from wikipedia
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Apparent_retrograde_motion
Sample Copernican explanation of the apparent retrograde motion may be found here: http://www.polaris.iastate.edu/EveningStar/Unit2/
unit2_sub2.htm (animation).
A video explanation is shown in this youtube including a possible project may be duplicated: https://www.youtube.com/watch?
v=1nVSzzYCAYk
Astronomical details and animations of the retrograde motion of Mars may be found in the NASA website: http://mars.nasa.gov/
allaboutmars/nightsky/retrograde/
Interesting activities may be obtained from: http://users.clas.ufl.edu/ufhatch/nsf-plans/1-5_ptolemac.htm
255
The telescope of Galileo and the

weakening of the two- LESSON OUTLINE
domains view Introduction/(
Review
Review of previous discussion 10
Motivation Activity on the Telescope 15

1. Discuss the role of the telescope in the advances of astronomy during the
Instruction(/( Discussion on Galileo and the features of the 25
time of Galileo Galilei. Delivery first made telescope
2. Identify discoveries about the celestial objects aided by telescopes up to
the time of Galileo. [IVb-43] Enrichment Conflicting views of the Universe 10
3. Explain how the astronomical observations aided by telescopes weakens Evaluation 10
Sketching of the different models of the
the philosophical supports to the Ptolemaic system. [IVb-43] universe
Materials 1. Actual telescope (if available), alternative

can be home-made or toy telescope
2. Video of Ptolemaic and Copernican
systems and retrograde motion
Resources(
(1) You may find a good discussion on the telescopes covering the
modern types: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Telescope;
(2) How to make homemade telescopes can be found here: http://
www.funsci.com/fun3_en/tele/tele.htm as an example
256
Answer questions related to the previous lessons.

Teacher(Tips:(
Recall with the students the prevailing challenge for the medieval philosophers and astronomers
• Emphasize that besides the retrograde
regarding the right model for the observed motion of the sky specifically the retrograde motion.
motion, the prediction of the relative
Proceed with the following points: position of the planets with respect to
(1) The availability of the astronomical data by Tyco Brahe gave reasons for the increasing the background stars and with
themselves are also crucial
complexity of the Ptolemaic system.
(2) The plausibility of many alternative explanations requires a new perspective in the
philosophical foundations and reasoning in defense of the model used in order to
scientifically choose which among these models are least likely to correspond to the physical
reality.
Discuss that the challenge is really more into the philosophical foundation since the time of • You may recall to them the two-domain
Aristotle: The Two-Domain System — A system that assumes the celestial domain is fundamentally system.
different both in composition (element: ether) and in the nature motion. In the celestial domains,
all objects are perfect (both shape and element) and their motion is always circular (perfect shape)
and constant (perfect state).
Mention that all naked-eye astronomical evidence cannot discern a best system for modeling the
Universe, between at least three: Ptolemaic, Copernican, and Ursine/Tychonic sytems.
MOTIVATION (15 MINS) • You may show them a sample of the

telescope and discuss the different
types of optical telescopes today:
Tell the students that these models were later confirmed only in the presence of available data
refracting, reflecting (see Ref 1).
through the TELESCOPE. In this regard, new observations have weakened the assumptions about • A toy telescope may be brought for
the celestial domains and new models besides the Ptolemaic model becomes acceptable. demonstrating the capability to make
faraway object seem nearer
257
Teacher(Tips:(
Option: Let the students calculate the magnification of a typical refracting telescope.
• A sample refracting telescope is
depicted in Appendix A.
Option: Students may be tasked to group into three or four and bring materials for making their • See Reference 2 for a sample website
own refracting telescopes using two refracting lenses (“magnifying glass”) and tubes made of on how to make a toy telescope.
cartolina or similar hard papers. • Remind the students to NEVER use the
telescope in viewing the Sun or similar
bright objects.
Clarify that Galileo was one of the first person who used the telescope to look at the celestial
objects. Galileo also improved by 1609 on the original telescope first made in 1608 as it appeared
in Netherlands. It can be said that he had the best refracting telescope of his day. • For more details regarding the Galilean
observations, you may read Reference
3.
Discuss the following observations and observations by the time of Galileo mostly by Galileo
• Images of the lunar craters, sun spots,
himself.
phases of Venus and the moons of
(1) Lunar craters Jupiter may be shown.
(2) Sun spots (WARNING: observed by projecting the image onto a screen!)
• Images closer to those sketched (they
(3) Changing shape of Saturn have no camera then) by Galileo may
be found in WWW such as those in
(4) Phases of Venus undergoing full cycle like the Moon
Appendix B.
(5) Moons of Jupiter
Discuss associating the observations to the conclusions against the prevailing Aristotelian physics
and the two-domains view of the Universe.
(1) Lunar craters, the Sun spots and the changing shape of Saturn — celestial objects are not
perfect (not necessarily crystalline perfect sphere)
(2) Moons of Jupiter — Not all celestial object necessarily orbits the Earth (or the Sun). Here, the
“stars” even orbit Jupiter, a planet.
258
(3) The phases of Venus being able to undergo the full cycle like the Moon goes in direct
opposition to the expectations based on the Ptolemaic system.
ENRICHMENT (10 MINS) Teacher(Tips:(
It is not uncommon that Galileo is depicted to have posited a view of the Universe in conflict with • You may hint that they may start with
that of the Catholic Faith. Ask students what they know about this so far. If there are rich opinions, the documentaries and begin digging
you may have them discuss among each other why. into the original documents such as the
minutes or transcripts of reports of
inquisitions including letters of the
Finally, give this as a research topic for the students to dig into the historical facts. Encourage the involved bishops on the findings on
Galileo’s “formal heresies” and final
students to dig into original sources as evidence against or in favor of this proposition.
verdict on his “house arrest.”
Ask the students to design a telescope using only two refracting lenses.
Mention that new models were proposed including the Tychonic/Ursine model — a hybrid of
heliocentric and geocentric models (also labeled “geoheliocentric system”).
Indicate that the real challenge for the scientist is how to discern which model best fits the available
data of their times. Mention that as a class, you will go through each of the following competing
models:
(1) Ptolemaic system
(2) Copernican system
(3) Ursine/Tychonic system
259
Discuss with the students what they think how such a model could be a good compromise between geocentric and heliocentric frameworks.
Discuss each model and how each are able to explain the main observation about the planets: retrograde motion. Concentrate mainly on how
the Copernican system explained it versus the way the Ptolemaic system does.
More detailed story of the different models are found online: “The Great Ptolemaic Smackdown” by Michael Flynn written August 2013. (See
reference link)
You may assign to the students to unravel possible alternative models that were proposed between the the lifetime of Ptolemy and that of
Tycho Brahe, but **before** the time of Kepler.
For a more mathematically-inclined class, you may challenge them to show that the Copernican system, the Tychonic system, and the Ptolemaic
system can be made mathematically equivalent with regards to the explanation of the apparent retrograde motion of the planets.
The Ptolemaic system uses several other “devices” such as equant and eccentric. These devices, including deferent and epicycle combinations
are used by the Copernican system as corrections to correspond to the astronomical data. You may discuss this in detail with the students if
time permits. If not, you may have it assigned as research paper.
Give a quiz asking the students to enumerate (e.g. at least give three) of the astronomical observations made using a telescope by Galileo
Galilei.
260
Appendix A: Refracting Telescope
A theoretical analysis of how a simple two-positive lens telescope is sketched below.
Image retrieved at: http://www.physchem.co.za/OB11-wav/instruments.htm#telescope
In this regard, the objective lens focuses at the primary focus (F1) a real image behind the secondary focus (F2) of the
second converging lens (eyepiece). The resulting virtual image will be larger depending on how near the real image is
behind F2. Typically, corrections are made so that F2 coincides with F1 for objects at infinity (e.g. sufficiently very far
objects such as the stars).
You may ask the students to show that the virtual image is larger (or magnified) compared to the objects at finite distance
from the objective lens.
261
Appendix B: Sample sketches by Galileo
262
Appendix C: Ptolemaic vs Copernican expectation on Venus 
263
A historical accounting of the competition of looking at the heavens are discussed here: http://tofspot.blogspot.com/2013/09/the-great-
ptolemaic-smackdown-great.html; The blog included as reference books such as http://www.amazon.com/Galileo-Rome-Rise-Troublesome-
Genius/dp/0195177584 “Galileo in Rome” by Shea and Artigas, also http://www.amazon.com/Galileos-Mistake-Confrontation-Between-
Galileo/dp/1559706848 “Galileo’s Mistake” by Wade Rowland.
Pictures of Galileo’s observations may be downloaded from an image search.
264
Tycho Brahe and Kepler’s

Three Laws of Planetary LESSON OUTLINE
Motion Introduction/(
Review
Discussion on the relation of the topic to
previous lessons
10
Instruction(/( Story of Kepler and Brahe 20

Delivery
1. Explain how Tycho Brahe’s innovation and extensive collection of Practice Drawing ellipses 20
astronomical data (naked-eye astronomy) paved the way for Kepler’s Enrichment Experimenting with ellipses 10
discovery of his laws of planetary motion. [IVb-44]
2. State Kepler’s Three Laws of Planetary motion. [IVb-45] Materials 1. two pins; string; clean paper;
drawing board/mat
Resources(
(1) Spielberg & Anderson, “Seven Ideas that Shook the Universe”
2nd Ed (John Wiley & Sons, 1995), Chapter 2 (Section F
“Kepler’s Heliocentric Theory”) pp.44ff; Other discussions on
“Kepler’s Three Laws of Planetary Motion” is available online
such as URL http://www.studyphysics.ca/newnotes/20/
unit02_circulargravitation/chp08_space/lesson34.htm (accessed
October 2015). Make sure to take as reference educational
websites ending with .edu as well as from universities.;
(2) Contributions of Tycho Brahe is listed in “The Observations of
Tycho Brahe” URL http://csep10.phys.utk.edu/astr161/lect/
history/brahe.html (accessed October 2015).
(3) Sample guide for drawing an ellipse may be accessed at
wikihow page, URL
265
Tell the students that this session will be a topic away from the series on Galileo.
Inform the students that Brahe’s observations were made long before the telescope was invented and used to view celestial objects.
Brahe’s observations paved way to doubt Ptolemaic model. It also called for the need for new models because the Ptolemaic model needs to
be complicated to become more accurate as precise astronomical data become available.
Tell the students that due to the honest consideration of the accurate data available, it was obvious that the centuries-old model had to be
replaced.
Discuss with the students that scientific ideas, even if they seem to be correct (even for more than 1400 years!) can become obsolete with
improved data.
It may also be mentioned that progress in scientific endeavor often requires the meeting of skills, patience in making observations, and making
available the data obtained.
Tell the students that today, you will tackle the three laws of planetary motion that were the most accurate depiction of how the planets go
about the Sun including how the moons revolve about their planets.
266
Teacher(Tips:(
Tell the story of how Brahe became famous by recalling the previous lesson on his observations:
(a) Supernova explosion of 11 Nov 1572 — named “Nova Stella”, now SN 1572 • Contributions of Brahe may be found in
(b) Comet in 1577 Reference #2 or similar URL.
(c) Better and more reliable astronomical data
Inform them that Kepler was hired as sort of “research assistant” by Brahe primarily to prove that
Brahe’s model (geoheliocentric model) of the Universe is consistent with the available data. Kepler
needed Brahe’s data to do mathematical analysis while Brahe needs Kepler to make mathematical
calculations to prove that the model satisfies the observed data.
Brahe died before his model is proven. Kepler inherited vast data set that will prove crucial for
developing his Three Laws of Planetary Motion later.
It took Kepler many more years trying out many possible models to fit the available data being
concerned largely on the philosophical implications of his models and the belief that there has to • Background material can be read from
be simple numerical relationships among phenomena like the Pythagoreans. Reference #1.
• Notable on Kepler’s “Mysterium

Cosmographicum” is his attempt to use
nesting of “Platonic solids” to explain
Emphasize that only after about 20 years or so working with the data he got from Brahe, the Three the spacing the the then known
Laws of Planetary Motion were published in two different years: number of planets (six).
(1) Law of Orbit (1609)
(2) Law of Equal Area (1609) • Here, emphasize that it was important
(3) Law of Period (1619) that Kepler was aware of the possible
errors (uncertainties) in the available
data such that he believed that the
Copernican model can still be improved
(see Reference #1, Section F.3.).
267
Discuss each laws of planetary motion to the students emphasizing the mathematical and geometric
patterns described by each law. Teacher(Tips:(
• Write on the board, use pre-prepared

Show them elliptical shape and their geometrical properties. slides or posters for this.
• You may use the Appendix A as a guide

Discuss that the second law necessarily imply that planets actually speeds up as it goes nearer to the for the appraisal of the Three Laws of
sun. You may ask the students to think how this variation of speeds can be explained by the second Planetary motion.
law.
• You may need to draw the ellipse and
or copy the figures from Reference #1.
Provide a table of values for the period T of the planets and their average distance from the Sun, D.
PRACTICE (20 MINS)
Lead the students in drawing ellipses. • See Reference #3 for a sample

procedure guide.
Ask the students to experiment with changing the following: (a) total length of the string used; (b) • You may use a software to do the same
though the pin-string-pencil works best
distance between pins (“foci”).
because students can see and feel the
drawing process.
Make the students realize that the actual eccentricities of the planetary orbits around the Sun is
• Note that the total length of the string
practically very small that they can be practically considered “circular.” is related to the semi-minor and semi-
major lengths and the smaller the
distance between foci makes the
ellipses closer to circles.
Ask the students possible applications of drawing ellipses. Mention for example Bernini in the use of
ellipses for perspectives in painting. These can also be used as guides in the arrangement of home.
They can be told to experiment on having a third pin situated not on the line joining the original two
pins and describe the effect on the resulting elliptical shape.
268
A project may be made to help illustrate the law of equal areas.
Appendix A: Three Laws of Planetary Motion by Kepler
The following text is taken from pp. 48-49 of Reference #1.
1. Law of Ellipse: The orbit of each planet about the Sun is an ellipse with the Sun at one of the foci of the ellipse.
Possible appraisal: The law of ellipse somehow replaced the perfection of the circular orbits somehow accepted by all the previous models.
In one sense, Kepler is saying that the new “perfect” shape must be an ellipse. In any case, a circular path is a degenerate ellipse with the
foci merging as the center of the circle.
2. Law of Equal Areas: The line joining the Sun and the planet (called the “radius vector”) sweeps over equal areas in equal times as the planet
travels around the orbit.
Possible appraisal: The law of equal areas somehow replaced the concept of uniform speed. In the case of Kepler’s laws, the new
requirement is the uniform “speed” of sweeping an area by the line joining the planet and the Sun.
3. Law of Period: The square of the period of revolution (time for one complete orbit) of a planet around the Sun is proportional to the cube of
the average distance of the planet from the Sun.
Possible appraisal: The Law of Period being related to the average distance of the planet from the Sun marked the conclusion that there is a
certain kind of harmonics in the Universe (remember that the Universe for scientists during the time of Kepler meant the entire Solar System
with the stars being “glued” to the celestial sphere eventually realized to be very very far since even with the aide of telescopes, the stars do
not exhibit parallax. In fact, the third law is also known as “Harmonic Law” described in a book called “Harmony of the World”.
269
Overall, we can also see that Kepler did further philosophical musings about the Laws he discovered. One such ideas was the identification of
“anima motrix” (literally, “motor life”) or the “Prime Mover” initially thought of by Aristotle. Such philosophical ideas could be identified as a
primitive idea of the gravitational forces exerted by the Sun to keep the planets in orbit.
270
Aristotelian and Galilean concepts of

motion LESSON OUTLINE
Introduction/( Review of astronomy and the Aristotelian 10
Learning(Competencies( Review physics, specific thesis of Aristotle
1. Compare and contrast the Aristotelian and Galilean concepts of motion:
Instruction(/( Galileo’s timeline. Experiments and 20
vertical, horizontal and projectile motions (IVc-46)
Delivery accomplishments of Galileo related to
2. Explain how Galileo was able to infer that (a) objects on the surface of the
motion, Leaning Tower of Pisa Experiment,
Earth falls at the same acceleration; and (b) force is not necessary to sustain
Philosophical Argument for equal rates of
horizontal motion (IVc-47)
fall, ramp experiments, falling demo.
Practice Additional reading on Aristotle’s and 20

Galileo’s life and works
Materials 1. Slides/poster of Galileo’s lifetime

2. Video of moon experiment on hammer
and feather
Resources(
(1) Spielberg & Anderson, “Seven Ideas that Shook the Universe”
2nd Ed (John Wiley & Sons, 1995), Chapter 3 (Section B.2
“Falling Bodies”) pp. 71ff.;
(2) One of the references regarding the accuracy of Galileo’s
infamous Leaning Tower of Pisa experiment is Phil. Ball “Science
history: setting the record straight”, The Hindu (a Hindu national
paper) URL http://www.thehindu.com/seta/2005/06/30/stories/
2005063000351500.htm (accessed October 2015) as cited in
the wikipedia article: URL https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galileo
%27s_Leaning_Tower_of_Pisa_experiment (accessed October
2015).
271
Teacher(Tips:(
Give a brief review of the development of astronomy up to the time of Galileo and Kepler in the
early to middle 1600s.
• You may show a timeline showing the
different personalities involved in
Explain that our current understanding on the physics of motion did not happen overnight. Astronomy during the time of Galileo.
Instead, it gradually developed as philosophers take up previously held philosophies and improve
on it or give critique identifying possible weakness or inconsistencies with observations. • An example of such timeline is shown in
Appendix A.
Mention that one of such concepts is the philosophy behind motion in two particular points:
(1) existence of one unifying explanation for the horizontal and vertical motions and how
projectile motions can be derived from the two.
(2) quantification of the “rate of fall” or “acceleration” as used by Aristotle.
Give a brief review of the physics of Aristotle related to the two-domain view of the Universe as
well as the four types of the terrestrial motion. Focus on the terrestrial motion briefly mentioning
the four types: (1) Alteration — simply chemical or physical changes, (2) natural local motion, (3) • The celestial motion will be discussed
horizontal or violent motion, and (4) celestial motion. later. It is important to note that
philosophically, these motions are by
there very essence different from each
Discuss natural motion in relation to the four-element model of Aristotle and their “natural other. The closest to each other would
position” in the Universe — Earth being at the middle of it, hence object made more of earth falls be natural motion and violent motion. It
“faster” than those made more of fire or air. is in this regard that the next point can
be discussed.
The concept of violent motion is related to the term “violent” being the state of motion that
• There should be an impression that the
prevents the attainment of natural progression of motion: either frustrates or goes against natural natural philosophers had to base their
motion. explanations of motion on the
prevailing philosophical standpoint
Encourage the students that while Galileo is popularly known to have finally nailed the following
early Aristotelian thesis on motion, previous ideas and even experimentation has already been
272
done.
(1) Aristotelian: Natural motion (largely vertical motion, falling or rising) and violent motion
Teacher(Tips:(
(largely associated with horizontal, hence projectile, motion) are two motions of distinct nature
(2) Aristotelian: A constant amount of force is needed to be applied to objects to keep them
• Contributions of Brahe may be found in
moving in horizontal motion. Reference #2 or similar URL.
Discuss the above premises were largely held by the philosophers and scientists from the time of
Aristotle up to the time of Galileo. It would have needed great scientific efforts (evidence and
• You may need to show a timeline
arguments) to change that view. similar to the one in Appendix A giving
temporal perspective on life of Galileo
relative to the other scientists and
Give notice that by the time of Galileo, several philosophers already knew of the increasing philosophers contemporary to him.
number of physical observations that violate majority of Aristotelian premises.
However, it can be credited to Galileo to quantify the “rate of fall” by measurement of distance
and time and plotting it graphically.
(1) He was able to slow down the “fall” using ramps rather than viscous materials as Aristotle
did resulting to significantly different conclusions related to the “rate of fall”.
(2) He correctly measured motion in two independent directions (horizontal and vertical) and
deduced that the “rate of fall” is better measured in terms of downward acceleration.
(3) Used geometry to provide better description (kinematics) of projectile motion whereby
horizontal motion has zero acceleration (constant speed horizontally) and content vertical
acceleration.
273
Discuss that the infamous Leaning Tower of Pisa experiment of Galileo may not be true but only
likely to have been done by Galileo. Other philosophers before him mentioned a very similar Teacher(Tips:(
observation. You may read the article “Science history: setting the record straight” by Phil Ball
(Reference #2). Reference 1 also mentions that the Experiment accounts is only found in the • You may show pictures of the Leaning
Tower of Pisa and tell the story of how
Bibliographic work for Galileo by one of his students, Vincenzo Viviani, who accordingly recounts Galileo allegedly demonstrated the
such Experiments done in 1589. equal rate of fall of objects differing in
weight.
• A similar experiment was done on the

Moon by an american astronaut David
Scott during the Apollo 15 mission. See
Reference 3.
• A falling demonstration may be done

Discuss the philosophical argument reductio ad absurdum method used by Galileo in showing that as depicted in Appendix B to sustain
the Aristotelian proposal that heavier objects fall at the same rate must be false and that the only the interest and attention of the class.\
plausible explanation is that all objects fall at the same rate.
• See Appendix C for the arguments of
Galileo. You might need to spend one
piece of chalk for this.
Add to the discussion that Galileo instead slowed down the “fall” using ramp. By plotting the
position against time, and at the same time increasing the slope, one can deduce that the resulting
“rate of fall” (or acceleration) approaches a single value.
274
Teacher(Tips:(
You may assign students to read about the life of Galileo as well as read on the other philosophers
who lived before him. Emphasize readings on the experiments that he did make in comparison to
• Reference #1 gives a brief account in
what others did.
Chapter 3 B.2 “Falling Bodies”.
• You may refer to the standard physics

Note that Aristotle concentrated on using viscous liquids to show differences on the “rates of fall”. It
text on the terminal velocity. See
appears that Aristotle could have been talking about “terminal velocity” for his concept of “rate of Reference #4 for an example.
fall.” You may discuss with the students that the terminal velocity is directly proportional to \sqrt{W}
or W, where W is the weight of the object, on the condition that the viscous medium is not changed,
the shape and roughness is the same. It depends on the best estimate for the dependence of the
drag force of the liquid to the speed of the object.
Appendix A: Sample timeline of astronomers and early physicists during the time of Galileo
275
Appendix B: Sample demonstration of falling bodies
276
Materials: (a) One coin; and (b) a piece of paper (may be a paper bill).
Directions: A mini Leaning Tower of Pisa experiment may be done using a piece of paper (or paper bill) and a coin. Obviously, one is lighter
than another. In their usual state, you may show to the students that when a paper (or bill) and a coin are released from rest in midair at the
same level, the coin will reach the ground first, showing that Aristotelian physics is right.
However, when the paper is crumpled the two will strike the ground at the same time, showing that Galileo’s conclusions are right.
You may ask one student to do the demo to increase class participation. It may also be done that mini-group be done and determine possible
special cases. For example, would the conclusion be the same if it’s done in greater height? WARNING: Experiments higher than one floor
height may pose danger to health or life. Notice that a standing height or even standing on a chair or table should be enough for the
demonstration objective.
Appendix C: Reductio ad absurdum argument of Galileo against Aristotelian rate of fall
Materials: You may simply draw on the board or use the one whole chalk for this. The chalk stick will be cut into half unequally.
Image: http://www.copblock.org/34690/las-vegas-metro-police-chalk-washes-off-but-
injustice-never-will-2/Retrieved:September 8, 2016
Procedure:
1. Show one whole piece of chalk to the students. Show how you divide it into two obviously unequal parts. Ensure that the two pieces of
chalk may still be re-united and appear like the original. An image below shows such obvious proportion of smaller and bigger portions
[ATTENTION: may need to redraw or take an original picture`].
277
2. Now, discuss that according to Aristotelian physics, heavier objects fall faster. If we accept this premise, then we expect that the larger
(heavier) piece will fall faster than the smaller (lighter) one.
3. However, we can imagine that when joined, the heavier part was actually tugging along the smaller piece so that as it pulls the smaller, the
smaller which should fall slower will, together with the heavier, fall at a slightly faster rate. The same conclusion can be made as the smaller
piece, since it falls at a slower rate, would slow down the fall of the heavier. Thus, together, they fall at a rate faster than the smaller piece
but slower than the larger, never outside the range between the two.
278
4. Now, imagine the original whole chalk. You may demonstrate that together (putting them back) this piece is heavier, both ideally and
physically. It is obviously heaver than any of the two, therefore should fall faster than any of the two.
5. The conclusion in No. 4 contradicts that of No. 3. Thus, the original premise cannot be true.
6. This contradiction can be removed if we initially assumed that both pieces fall at the same rate consistent with the proposal of Galileo.
279
YouTube video of a falling experiment done on the Moon during the Apollo 15 mission may be found here: “Feather and Hammer Drop on
Moon” https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5C5_dOEyAfk (accessed October 2015). Other versions of the video may be found in the Web.
Discussion on the terminal speeds as a function of the weight (product of mass and gravitational acceleration g) may be found in section “Fluid
Resistance and Terminal Speed” of Sears & Semanski’s “University Physics with Modern Physics” Technology Update on Young and Freedman
13th Edition (pp.169ff).
280

Physical Science PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physical Science PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physical Science PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this teaching guide?

What is the purpose of this teaching guide?

What are some of the experiments discussed in the guide?

What are some of the experiments discussed in the guide?

The Commission on Higher Education

in collaboration with the Philippine Normal University

Teaching Guide for Senior High School

College Readiness Standards Foundational Skills DepEd Functional Skills

Global awareness, scientific and economic literacy, curiosity,

Global awareness, media literacy, technological literacy,

Global awareness, multicultural literacy, collaboration and

Science understanding of the Cosmos.

Grade: Grade 11/12 No. of Hours/Quarter: 40 hours/quarter

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

3. write the nuclear fusion

4. describe how elements heavier

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

4. how the concept of the

7. describe the contributions of the

8. point out the main ideas in the

9. cite the contributions of J.J.

10. describe the nuclear model of

11. explain how the concept of

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

12. write the nuclear reactions

13. cite the contribution of John

14. explain how Dalton’s theory

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

7. explain how the properties of the

8. explain how the structures of

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

4. calculate percent yield of a

5. determine the limiting reactant

6. recognize that energy is released

7. describe how energy is

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

3. give the use of the other S11/12PS-IIIi-j-32

4. give common examples of S11/12PS-IIIi-j-33

(5 hours for competences 2-6)

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

the center of the universe

4. explain how Plato’s problem of

5. compare and contrast the

6. cite examples of astronomical

7. compare and contrast

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

8. explain how Galileo’s

9. explain how Brahe’s innovations

10. apply Kepler’s 3rd law of

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

scientific objections to the

5. mass, momentum, and 3. explain how the position vs.

4. recognize that the everyday

5. explain each of Newton’s three

CONTENT CONTENT STANDARD PERFORMANCE STANDARD LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE

6. explain the subtle distinction

7. use algebra, Newton’s 2nd Law

8. explain the statement “Newton's

9. explain the contributions of

Figure 2. Significant nuclear reactions during Big Bang nucleosynthesis. 